SGC SG-2000 Programming Manual


Add to my manuals
242 Pages

advertisement

SGC SG-2000 Programming Manual | Manualzz

SG-2000 MANUAL

SG-2000

1.6-30 MHz

150 Watt Output

Multi-Mission

HF SSB

Transceiver

Operations and Programming Manual

Revised: Oct, 1995

CAUTION:

Carefully read the "Quick Start" (yellow card packed with your radio) and the "Operating the SG-2000" section of this manual beginning on Page 41. The SG-2000 is a high precision electronic device. Taking the time to learn all of its capabilities will insure maximum performance, reliability and enjoyment of the unit.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 General Description and Specifications.......................................................1

1.1 General Description of the SG-2000 ........................................1

1.2 Power Requirements .................................................................2

1.3 SG-2000 Performance Specifications .......................................2

1.4 Data Comunications ..................................................................3

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

Computer Control of SG-2000..................................................3

Multiple Control Head Specifications.....................................4

Dimensions and Weight............................................................4

Standard Features ......................................................................4

External Accessories ..................................................................5

1.10 Internal Accessories...................................................................5

2.0 Unpacking .......................................................................................................7

3.0 History of the SG-2000 .....................................................................................8

4.0 About the SG-2000 ............................................................................................10

4.1 Receiver Signal Path ..................................................................10

4.2 Transmitter Signal Path.............................................................11

4.3 Control Circuits..........................................................................12

4.4 Control Heads.............................................................................13

4.5 SG-2000 Front Panel...................................................................13

4.6 SG-2000 Rear Panel ....................................................................13

5.0 SGC Family of Control Heads........................................................................14

5.1

5.2

Remote Mobile Heads ...............................................................14

PowerTalk™ and PowerTalk™ SA .........................................14

6.0 SG-2000 Software and Accessories ................................................................15

6.1

6.2

GPS Software ..............................................................................15

Oil Platform Software................................................................15

7.0 Planning for Installation .................................................................................16

7.1 Location of Power Supplies......................................................16

7.2 Control Head Placement...........................................................16

7.3 Control Head Wiring.................................................................17

7.4 External Speakers.......................................................................17

7.5 External Accessories ..................................................................18

8.0 Radio Licenses ...................................................................................................19

8.1 Station Licenses ..........................................................................19

8.2 Operator Licenses ......................................................................20

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 i

SG-2000 MANUAL

ii

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

9.0 Installation .......................................................................................................21

9.1

9.2

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

SG-2000 Rear Panel Connections .............................................21

External Coupler Installation ...................................................22

External Modem, Weatherfax and High Seas Direct™ ........23

Continuous Duty Ratings .........................................................23

Rack Mount Kit Installation (Part No. 52-90).........................24

Control Head Installations........................................................27

Remote Head Kit Installation (Part No. 04-12) ......................27

Additional Control Heads (Part No. 04-11) ...........................28

Remote Head Cable Extension.................................................29

10.0 Power Supplies..................................................................................................30

10.1 Cabling.........................................................................................30

10.2 AC Power Supplies....................................................................31

10.3 Transformer-Rectifier Supplies................................................31

10.4 Mobile Power Supplies .............................................................32

10.5 Solar-Powered Chargers ...........................................................33

11.0

Antenna Systems...............................................................................................34

11.1 Antenna Wire Size .....................................................................35

11.2 Near Vertical Incidence Skywave............................................36

11.3 Base Station and Fixed Antennas ............................................36

11.4 Antenna Feed Lines ...................................................................37

11.5 Antenna Couplers......................................................................37

11.6 Mobile Antennas ........................................................................38

11.7 QMS Recommended for Mobile Use.......................................39

11.8 Unconventional Mobile Antennas...........................................40

12.0 Operating the SG-2000 .....................................................................................41

12.1 Syntax ..........................................................................................41

12.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................43

12.3 Push-Button Functions..............................................................44

13.0 Tour of the SG-2000..........................................................................................49

12.4 Sample Entries............................................................................48

13.1 Front Panel Display ...................................................................49

13.2 Front Panel Controls..................................................................52

13.3 Primary Keyboard Functions ...................................................52

13.4 Shift Functions............................................................................57

13.5 Program Functions.....................................................................59

13.6 Operating Session ......................................................................59

13.7 Channel........................................................................................60

13.8 Frequency....................................................................................61

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 iii

SG-2000 MANUAL

13.9 Programming..............................................................................63

13.10 Scanning Functions....................................................................64

13.11 Changing Frequency or Channel Scan Rates.........................68

13.12 Additional Functions.................................................................69

14.0 Mobile Installation ...........................................................................................75

14.1 Shock and Vibration Mounting................................................75

14.2 Mobile Grounds .........................................................................76

14.3 Vehicular Noise Sources ...........................................................78

15.0 Marine Installation ...........................................................................................80

15.1 Marine Radio Mounting ...........................................................80

15.2 Marine Ground Systems ...........................................................80

15.3 Marine Antennas........................................................................82

15.4 High Seas Direct™ Connections..............................................82

16.0 Remote Control..................................................................................................85

16.1 Extension of Control Head Wiring..........................................85

16.2 Short Haul Modems/Auto-Answer Devices.........................86

16.3 Line of Demarcation ..................................................................86

16.4 Auto-Answer Devices ...............................................................87

16.5 Computer Networks - Serial Control......................................87

17.0 External Software ..............................................................................................88

17.1 RS-232 Serial Control Software ................................................88

17.2 RS-232 Software Installation.....................................................89

17.3 Main Menu Display ...................................................................92

17.4 Main Menu Operations .............................................................93

17.5 Menu 2 Operations ....................................................................95

17.6 Programming Functions ...........................................................96

17.7 PC Cable Assembly....................................................................98

18.0 ALE and Adaptive Controllers .......................................................................100

18.1 SG-2000 Serial Port Operation..................................................101

18.2 Serial Communication Protocol...............................................102

18.3 ALE Controller-Command Examples.....................................103

18.4 Recall a Selected SG-2000 Memory Into Active Use .............103

19.0 Accessories 106

18.5 SG-2000 Connections to ALE Controller ................................104

19.1 Exsel-100 Selective Calling System..........................................106

19.2 Telerex™ ARQ/FEC/SELFEC System...................................107

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 iv

SG-2000 MANUAL

20.0 Answers to Frequently Asked Questions.....................................................108

v

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.0 Technical Reference..........................................................................................110

21.1 Squelch Scale Recalibration ......................................................110

21.2 SG-2000 Microprocessor Reset Procedure..............................110

21.3 Emergency Calling.....................................................................111

21.4 Basic Tune-up Procedure (Alignment) ...................................112

21.5 AM Filter Bypass........................................................................113

21.6 Oscillator and Filter Operation ................................................113

21.7 Microprocessor Assembly ........................................................115

21.8 VCO's ...........................................................................................115

21.9 PLL's.............................................................................................115

21.10 Serial Logic Switches .................................................................116

21.11 Tone Generator...........................................................................116

21.12 Oven Switch................................................................................116

21.13 Alarm Generator ........................................................................116

21.14 Master Oscillator with Oven ....................................................117

21.15 Crystal Oven...............................................................................117

21.16 Output Low Pass Filters............................................................118

21.17 Automatic Level Control ..........................................................118

21.18 Modulation Characteristics, AFR ............................................118

21.19 Modulation Characteristics, PEP Limiting.............................119

21.20 SG-2000 Performance Measurements .....................................121

22.0 Trouble Shooting ..............................................................................................127

22.1 Dysfunctions ...............................................................................127

22.2 Scanning in One Direction Only ..............................................128

23.0 Test Procedures..................................................................................................129

23.1 Exciter Testing Procedures .......................................................129

23.2 LPA Testing Procedures............................................................156

23.3 Display Section Testing Procedures........................................163

23.4 Head CPU and Main CPU Testing Procedures .....................171

23.5 Final Assembly Testing Procedures ........................................178

24.0 Schematic Reference Section ..........................................................................180

INDEX .......................................................................................................................210

Appendix A, Frequency List .......................................................................................A-1

vi

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

1.0

General Description and Specifications

This section includes a short description of the features of the SG-2000 Transceiver along with its specifications. This manual includes information useful for the SG-2000, the SG-2000 SlimPak, and the Military version (PRC-2250 MIL).

1.1 General Description of SG-2000

Model

Channels

Scan channels

SG-2000

100 channels field programmable

644 factory programmed ITU voice and data channels

Up to 100 channels programmable in 6 groups of 10 channels each

Scan frequency

Scan frequency

range

Scan dwell time

In 0.1, 0.5, 1, 3, and 5 KHz steps

Full HF range or a selected range of frequencies

Adjustable from .1 to 40 seconds

Frequency scan dwell: .1 to 1 second

Channel dwell time: .2 to 40 seconds

Transmitter frequency range 1.6 to 30 MHz

Receiver frequency range 1600 KHz to 30 MHz (500 KHz - 30 MHz Optional)

Frequency stability ±10 Hz

Frequency resolution 100 Hz

Modes

Protection

A3A, A3H, A3J and CW in LSB and USB, True AM detector in receive mode. Data modes supported by external controllers.

Fully protected against damage due to battery reversal, over

Display

Metering

AGC

Keypad voltage, or antenna fault (open or short).

LCD for frequency or channel with annunciators of all functions and modes, 20-segment bar meter, and time or date

S-meter in RX mode, forward power or VSWR in TX mode

Fast attack slow release in Voice mode. Extremely fast attack fast release in telex and ALE modes.

21 push-buttons include power, up/down, all functions, and numeric entry

1

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

Alarm generator

SG-2000 MANUAL

Programmed for standard ITU and CCIR alarm on emergency frequency 2182 KHz or can be broadcast on any frequency. Having to press two push-buttons simultaneously to activate transmitter prevents accidental alarm.

2

Operating temperature

Full specification temperature

Approvals

Color

Front panel

1.2

-45° to 85° C

-30° to 60° C

FCC type accepted, parts 80, 87 and 90. DOC and

CEPT(pending). Meets CCIR specification for receiver and transmitter* (see page 5)

Black

Splash proof, removable and may be mounted remotely

Transceiver Power Requirements

Nominal

Full specification compliance

Full operation

Current drain when radio off:

STBY mode,

Oven on; oven off;

1.3

13.6 VDC; 0.8A RX, 16A TX (voice)

11.5 VDC

10.5 to 18.0 VDC

430 mA

80 mA

SG-2000 Performance Specifications

RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS

Sensitivity

Selectivity

Intermodulation

Blocking

Transmodulation

Image and IF

rejection

Audio output

Audio distortion

.5µV produces .5W of audio with 10dB SNR (Signal to noise ratio may vary from 7 to 16 dB at nominal .5 µV input)

2.4 KHz at -6 dB; 4 KHz at -60 dB shape factor better than 2:1)

+86 dB (CCIR specification)

+100 dB (CCIR specification)

+ 95 dB (CCIR specification)

+90 dB

4W with less than 10% distortion

Less than 5% at 3W

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

AGC response

Clarifier range

Less than 5dB variation at the output for 5µVolt to 1

Volt RMS at the receiver input

±600 Hz in 100 Hz steps

Receiver protection Up to 50 Volt RMS at the receiver input

Squelch Voice operated with syllabic detection — adjustable threshold

Speaker Internal ( on removable front panel)

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS

Power output in

50 ohms 150 watts* PEP ( +0dB to -.5 dB) (see page 5)

Power output reduction

Maximum stress power output

To less than 50 watts PEP

225 watts CW*** (see page 5)

Sideband suppression Better than -50 dB at 1400 Hz

Harmonic suppression Better than -63 dB** (see page 5)

Carrier suppression (A3J) Better than -55 dB

Carrier level

Noise suppression

Distortion

(third order)

Audio response

(A3H) -3 dB

(A3A) -16 dB

Better than -60 dB

Better than -32 dB at 135W PEP

Flat within 6 dB between 350 & 2400 Hz

VSWR protection For 4:1 VSWR, power output will reduce below 50 watts PEP

Thermal protection For 80°C power output will reduce below 50 watts PEP

1.4

Ready and compatible RTTY, ARQ, FEC, PACKET and telegraphy

Receive/transmit switching time

AFSK input/output

10 mS nominal impedance

AFSK input level

600?

Minimum required 100 mV RMS, 2V RMS maximum

AFSK output level 240mV RMS at .5µV, maximum 1V RMS

1.5

Data Communications

Computer Control of SG-2000

Input/Output

©1995, SGC, Inc.

RS 232

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

3

Access and recall

Software

System software

SG-2000 MANUAL

Of all transceiver functions except audio

SG-2000 for DOS (Supplied with C language source code)

DOS Ver. 3.0 or greater for IBM and compatibles (user supplied)

4

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

1.6

SG-2000 MANUAL

Multiple Control Head Specifications

Local

Remote

Intercom

Maximum number of controllers

Telephone remote

One controller mounted to the radio (except SlimPak)

Up to 50 meters away from the radio (10 wires)

On all remotes

8 (Total of control heads and computers not to exceed 8)

Through standard telephone line and modem with telecommunication software and SGC-RS-232 software

1.7 Dimensions and Weight

Overall Dimensions 11.7 (H) x 25.4 (W) x 38 (L) cm 4.75 in. (H) x 10 (W) x 15

(L) inches (SlimPak 1" less in height)

Weight 5.4 kg (12 lbs)

1.8 Standard Features

• Full remote control, up to 8 stations

• Upper or lower sideband select

• A3A, A3H and A3J select

• Emergency 2182 direct select (Standard Head only)

• Voice or Telerex (narrow band) filter select

• CW side tone oscillator, CW with break-in

• Alarm Generator

• Speaker on/off, rear panel audio I/O port for modems, Weatherfax

• Headset/handset driver separate from speaker

• Carbon or dynamic microphone select switch

• Squelch on/off and level set

• Coupler tuned indicator

• 20 dB receive attenuator

• Transmitter power level set (50 or 150W)

• Transmitter over temperature indication and thermal protection

• Receive S-meter and transmit forward power or SWR meter display

• Time of day or date display

• Radio on/off timer

• Intercom with all stations or private channel select

5

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

1.9

SG-2000 MANUAL

External Accessories

• Marine antennas

• Vehicular antennas

• Whip antenna in 8, 23, 28 or 35 ft. lengths

• SG-103 broadband antenna, 2-28 MHz

• SG-103-T tactical broadband antenna, 2-28 MHz

• Dipole antenna for 1,2 & 3 specified frequencies

• Field adjustable dipole antenna

• SGC Portamast

• SG-230 150 Watt MicroProcessor controlled antenna coupler

• SG-230 Pro 150 Watt MicroProcessor controlled antenna coupler

• SG-235 500 Watt MicroProcessor controlled antenna coupler

• PS-30 power supply for base station (unregulated)

• PS-35 power supply for base station (regulated)

• Standard mounting tray

• Shock mounting tray for high vibration installations

• Battery cable

• External speaker

• CW telegraphy key

• Dynamic desk and noise canceling fist microphone

• Military handset (waterproof, dustproof, shock-proof)

• Telephone handset

• Tel-Two phone patch

• Linear power amplifiers, 500 & 1000 watts output

• Front panel customizing

• TELEREX ARQ, FEC and PACKET systems

• ALE adaptive controller

1.10 Internal Accessories

• High power CW continuous fan kit

• ALE (Automatic Link Establishment) AGC switching (Specify at time of order)

• Special Software options: Hong Kong, France (and Territories), Oil

Platform

Notes: * CFT8DK SG-2000 (1.8 to 26 MHz international radio marine bands)

** For international marine bands

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

6

SG-2000 MANUAL

*** Under ambient temperature and normal load conditions

7

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TRANSMIT UNTIL THE

RADIOTELEPHONE IS WARMED UP FOR AT

LEAST TEN MINUTES.

The crystals that control the operating frequency are contained in a precision oven that requires 10 minutes to rise to the correct temperature. Transmitting before the

10 minute warm-up period has elapsed may cause a violation of FCC regulations.

Precautions:

1. Operating and installation personnel must observe all applicable safety regulations at all times. Do not operate unit without covers in place with power on.

Under certain conditions, dangerous electrical voltages may exist. To avoid injuries, always confirm removal of power and discharge and ground all circuits before touching them.

2. Do not service or adjust equipment when alone. Under no circumstances should you reach into live equipment for the purposes of adjustment or servicing unless there is someone else present who is capable of rendering aid.

3. Personnel working with or near AC power sources, power supplies and high power radio equipment should be familiar with modern first aid techniques and resuscitation.

4. When servicing, observe static discharge precautions to avoid damage to microprocessors and solid state devices.

5. When servicing multiple control head installations, disconnect all remote heads at J-503 on the rear panel of SG-2000 to prevent other personnel from keying the transmitter during servicing.

SGC reserves the right to change specifications without notice.

2.0 Unpacking

The standard packaging for an SG-2000, the cardboard box and packing materials, should be retained for future use should the radio need to be shipped elsewhere.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

8

SG-2000 MANUAL

Please note that the radio arrived in a polyethylene bag which includes the instruction manual, warranty registration card and a quick reference card. Information on use of

AT&T High Seas services is also provided for your convenience. The plastic bag protects the unit from dust and moisture when shipping. If there is condensation on the inside of the polyethylene bag because the radio was subjected to extreme change of temperature during shipment, please leave the plastic covering on the radio until it has come up to ambient temperature and the condensation has evaporated.

You will notice a piece of foam rubber on the face plate of the radio, held in place with tape. It is designed to protect the plastic face plate of the LCD. Whenever you are shipping an SG-2000, it is good practice to secure a cover over the LCD. Small scratches in the face plate of the LCD may be removed with Plexiglas™ cleaner such as is used to clean aircraft windows.

The SG-2000 should be closely inspected upon arrival. As the units leave the SGC factory, they are in perfect operating condition. Should you notice any bent sheet metal, or flecks of paint in the shipping box, you may assume that the radio has taken a hard shock somewhere in shipping.

The radio will usually continue to operate, even if subjected to abuse in shipping, but please make sure that if you notice any shipping damage, you file a damage report immediately with the carrier.

In the unlikely event that your unit has been damaged in shipping, your dealer can instruct you on how to handle servicing or replacing the unit. If your dealer does not know the proper procedure, you may contact SGC directly.

SGC provides a complete five-year parts and labor guarantee. However, this guarantee does not apply to radios which are used in para-military and military operations, as combat conditions are specifically excluded from our guarantee.

9

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

3.0 History of the SG-2000

The SG-2000 is a high performance, microprocessor (computer) controlled multimission HF SSB radio designed to meet the needs of marine, commercial, para-military, and amateur radio users through the year 2000 and beyond.

The SG-2000's heritage includes the SG-705, the world's smallest commercial HF SSB, the SG-715 waterproof manpack radio, and the SG-712 EX-11 which has been proven in commercial and military applications in all regions of the world.

The SG-2000 also benefits from SGC's expertise in microprocessor design, developed as the company evolved its line of fully automatic antenna couplers. SGC's fully automatic antenna couplers have been available since 1975 and the current computerized SG-230 series of couplers has been continuously upgraded to maintain technical dominance through software enhancements.

The SG-2000 was conceived by SGC President Pierre Goral and the SGC Engineering staff to meet an emerging need in HF communications for a relatively low cost, highly reliable yet flexible communications platform which would be suited to multiple control- point operation and would allow complete computer control if desired.

This was done after a careful study of emerging HF radio technology in the military and government sector and with an eye to providing the users of SGC equipment with the highest level of flexibility, not only today but in the future as well.

It was clear from the SGC analysis that to an increasing degree, personal computers would be integrated into mobile, fixed, and sea going radio operations. In addition, a whole new field called Adaptive Controllers was being developed for government and military use.

The SG-2000 design project became an all-consuming effort among the team members who studied all available information in order to provide a radio which would meet modern communications needs. The process was to collect and analyze all available trend information, review not only cutting edge but projected technology, and then build the radio that would meet all of these needs.

It is interesting to note the design team's criteria:

• The ideal radio would weigh as little as possible, under 6 kilograms would be ideal. The radio would need to operate from any location. This meant telephone line control for control at distances of several thousand miles, or by hard wire

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

10

SG-2000 MANUAL

control for local use at short to moderate distances.

• This radio would need to be controllable by a computer or its own control heads and it would have to support control from up to eight locations all at the same time. It would also be nice if the radio could be directed through a local area network with one computer on the network operating as a gateway.

• In addition, the eight locations would have to be connected via an intercom, the radio would need to be of high physical strength, and would be able to operate over extremes of temperature and humidity.

The SG-2000 would also have to meet exacting performance standards for frequency stability and for speed of operations in order to accommodate some of the more exotic demands of the para-military and military markets.

The result of the design effort is the SG-2000, the world's first truly computer-directed civilian radio. Many of the attributes of the SG-2000 can be found in very expensive military units, some costing 10 times the price of an SG-2000 and not generally available to the public.

In 1992, SGC introduced a ruggedized version of the SG-2000 designed for para-military use called the PRC-2250 MIL. This radio features many SG-2000 options ordered by

(para) military organizations. It is finished in an olive drab color and comes with a military type shock mount with a waterproof handset standard, which distinguishes it from the SG-2000 in appearance.

In 1994, SGC introduced a SlimPak version. The SlimPak has all the features of the SG-

2000 and uses the same control head; yet the main unit measures a full 1 inch less in height, enabling placement in much tighter quarters.

In 1995, SGC introduced a new model of the SG-2000 control head called the

PowerTalk™ that incorporates ADSP™ and SNS™ noise reduction and noise filtering capabilities.

11

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

4.0 About the SG-2000

The basic SG-2000 is really two units, which may be easily separated. One unit is what is called the Radio or RF unit. This contains the receiver and the transmitter's exciter and linear power amplifier modules. In addition, it contains the SG-2000's main microprocessor.

The second unit, normally supplied attached to the radio unit, is called the control head.

In it are audio amplifiers, the radio's frequency and channel displays, a keyboard to control radio functions and another microprocessor which "talks" to the main radio unit.

12

Audio wiring at 600 ohms plus

RS-422 (9600 baud) Serial Bus

SG-2000 RF Unit

To additional heads

(8 maximum)

Control Head Control Head

RS-232 (9600 baud)

Serial Port for computer

One control head may be attached to the SG-2000 RF unit. Up to seven others may be located up to 50 meters away from the RF unit using 10-conductor cable.

4.1 Receiver Signal Path

The receiver section, located in the main radio unit, features signal up conversion (from

82 to 88 MHz) to achieve maximum image rejection and to allow wide band processing of signals. Then the signal is converted down to 10.7 MHz where an extraordinarily sharp crystal filter removes all unwanted signals, including strong unwanted signals which have not been eliminated by the 82-88 MHz filters.

The 10.7 MHz signal is further amplified and is then decoded by one of the two detectors in the radio. For single sideband, CW (Morse Code), and data operations, a product detector is used. For AM, the SG-2000 provides one of the few "true AM" detectors available today. This provides for extremely clear reception and excellent

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

capture of signals in all modes.

SG-2000 MANUAL

13

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Once amplified to a standard level, the audio is sent to a jack on the back of the SG-2000 which allows for connection to a control head. In the control heads, the audio signal is further amplified and processed.

A syllabic squelch circuit (which was pioneered by SGC in 1976) is used to turn off the noise coming out of the speaker in the event that a signal is not being received.

The next step is a digital gate which controls the volume of the receiver by very rapidly sampling the signal and passing only a certain number of samples

a number which varies by the setting of the volume control on the front panel of the radio. Naturally, this happens at speeds which you can not hear, so your ear hears smooth control of the volume function.

4.2 Transmitter Signal Path

Pressing the push to talk button grounds the push-to-talk line, placing the SG-2000 in the transmit mode. At the same time, the sound of your voice is shaped by an audio amplifier in the control head. This is brought up to a standard level to be sent out the transmit audio bus.

This line leaves the control head via the 10-conductor control head cable and returns to the SG-2000 RF unit via the rear panel connector where the head plugs into the rear panel of the radio.

Inside the radio, the audio signal is shaped and amplified. It is turned into an AM signal which is then processed to remove the desired amount of carrier. This is accomplished by a balanced modulator. In the single sideband mode, all of the carrier is removed. If required, the carrier is reinserted for other modes.

In the AME (AM Equivalent) mode, 40-50 W of the carrier is reinserted. And if you are operating in the A3A mode which is used for certain kinds of commercial radio work, then you put back about 1/8th of the carrier, leaving just enough of the signal to act as a "pilot carrier" for specialized receivers.

Next, the signal is amplified and passed through a crystal filter, where one sideband is removed. This is done by offsetting the transmit frequency slightly. On one side of the filter slope, the upper sideband is removed, while offsetting on the other side of the 10.7

MHz filter will remove the lower sideband.

When you are in the single sideband mode, you have now developed either the desired upper or lower sideband filter at this point. From here on, the amplifiers which will be processing the signal are called "linear amplifiers" because if they are not linear, they will distort the signal, just like a non-linear audio amplifier would distort a signal on your home stereo.

The 10.7 MHz single sideband signal is then converted up to 82-88 MHz, where harmonics are eliminated by the helical filter. The output of the 82-88 MHz filter is

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

14

SG-2000 MANUAL

mixed with the correct frequency developed by the synthesizer and is then amplified at the operating frequency.

This amplification process involves several steps: a pre-driver, a driver, and a final amplifier section which utilizes a splitter - combiner circuit

The pre-driver and the driver sections are very straight-forward in design. But the final

LPA (Linear Power Amplifier) deserves special note because it is very conservatively constructed. This amplifier is made up of four transistors. While most designers will use only two, SGC elected to use four for reliability and peak power performance.

Controlling the LPA is a circuit called ALC (Automatic Level Control) which adjusts the operating conditions of the final amplifier to insure its operation is linear over a wide range of conditions.

A broad band filter network then matches the high power signal to a 50 ohm output impedance. This is then sent to the SG-230 Smartuner (which we highly recommend) or a broad band antenna system such as the SG-103.

4.3 Control Circuits

The SG-2000 is a microprocessor controlled radio. Each of the control heads has a microprocessor and talks to the microprocessor in the radio unit using the RS-422 communications protocol. This means that the control head may be placed as much as

50 meters away from the radio. Although not supported by SGC, many users of the control heads have reported success at longer distances. As with all SGC specifications,

50 meters is a conservative number.

The microprocessor control codes, which are generated when the front panel push buttons are pushed, are sent to the microprocessor in the radio unit which return confirmation to the control head that the instructions have been acted upon. The head microprocessor controls the display information and functions such as setting of volume and squelch levels.

Each of the control heads has a unique device address which allows the microprocessors in the radio unit to send information as well as establish the intercom address of the control head.

In the event that you wish to address the microprocessors on the radio unit directly, you may use the RS-232 serial port which is located on the rear panel of the radio.

Any number of serial ports and heads may be used, as long as the total number of device addresses does not exceed eight. Four control heads and four computers works as well as one control head and seven computers.

15

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

For more information on controlling the SG-2000 via computer, see Section 16.5 of this manual regarding "Computer Networks - Serial Control" and the parts of Section 17.0 dealing with RS-232 software.

4.4 Control Heads

There are several design considerations behind the SG-2000 control head which you should know about in order to appreciate the beauty of the architecture of the radio.

Our many years of manufacturing experience have taught us the value of absolute reliability and of the importance of easy reparability in the field. Such philosophies as designing in a 10-conductor control cable between our radios and remote heads rather than a fiber optic cable is one example. SGC has learned that while fiber optics are an excellent material, they are not easily reparable in the middle of the desert or ocean.

SGC products are designed for field repair and performance where well-engineered products dramatically become evident.

4.5 SG-2000 Front Panel

The front of the SG-2000 controls all radio functions. All of the push buttons are rubberized to provide good tactile response and to keep the radio highly resistant to water and dust, two of the worst enemies of electronic equipment.

The LCD which displays the frequency is the largest available on a radio of this type.

The speaker is treated to resist moisture. The speaker grill is designed to prevent direct spray from hitting the speaker.

Because the front panel has been ruggedly built, the advantage of mounting the more sensitive radio unit elsewhere becomes apparent.

4.6 SG-2000 Rear Panel

A series of Jacks on the back of the SG-2000 provide access to radio features and accessories. Most of these jacks are covered by a metal "U" bracket which is held in place by three small Phillips head machine screws. If you ever have occasion to remove this cover, it is important that it be replaced in order to provide physical protection for the jacks.

Under the "U" bracket, from left to right, you will find a jack to plug in one of the family of SGC's Smartuners. The next plug (J-301) presents audio input and output lines, plus push-to-talk control. This is where Weatherfax, data controllers (such as an SGC

Telerex™ SITOR modem), and ALE units are plugged in.

The next two jacks are for plugging in two control heads. If you are using more than one control head, one will plug in to the right hand head plug while a multiple plug adapter unit plugs into the left control head jack and provides for up to seven additional head connections.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

16

SG-2000 MANUAL

The last jack, J505, is used for connecting an external speaker. This is also the most common connection for the Weatherfax.

In addition, just to the right of the "U" bracket is an RS-232 connector for computer control of the SG-2000 radio, as explained later in this manual.

17

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

5.0 SGC Family of Control Heads

The SG-2000 comes with the standard control head described throughout this manual.

In addition, there are six other control heads to choose from. These range from the small remote mobile heads to the new PowerTalk™ head incorporating ADSP™ and SNS™ noise reduction capabilities.

5.1 Remote Mobile Heads

The four models of the remote mobile heads are designed to be used in conjunction with the SG-2000. They have simplified control functions and a much smaller footprint.

They include the basic version, the aircraft version, the Exsel version and the remote mobile head with ADSP™ noise reduction.

Please contact SGC for information on any of these optional heads.

5.2 PowerTalk™

Another optional control head is our newly released PowerTalk™ head. The

PowerTalk™ head is the same size as the standard remote head but with more versatility, including the additional benefit of state of the art noise reduction circuits to let the user filter out unwanted noise.

Please contact SGC for information on this model.

18

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

6.0 SG-2000 Software and Accessories

This section lists various software options that are available for the MicroProcessor controlled SG-2000. In the event that you own an SG-2000 and later wish to add different software, such as the GPS software, Oil Rig software, Hong Kong software, or other software as may be periodically published, please be advised that there is a software update charge if the software is retrofitted into an existing radio.

6.1 GPS Software

Effective April 1, 1992, a special edition of the SG-2000 main microprocessor software was published to meet the needs of the oil and gas exploration industry for a radio which would not search the international emergency frequency, 2182 KHz, when the radio is first turned on. The special software is now standard.

In addition, the SG-2000, which was adapted to differential GPS radio location service in January of 1992 has special cooling modifications which allow it to operate under severe service for unlimited time. The additional cooling systems may be ordered by users who anticipate extended key down operations, including differential GPS, ALE,

SITOR/AMTOR/RTTY, and other data modes or plan to subject the SG-2000 to unusually warm operations (such as desert vehicle installations).

6.2 Oil Platform Software

In May 1992, special software became available for the main MicroProcessor of the SG-

2000 which will allow the transmission of an emergency distress tone on all frequencies, removing the normal limit of transmitting on only the international emergency frequency, 2182 KHz. This was done at the request of oil exploration companies who have been using the SG-2000 successfully in offshore oil exploration work and who are required, because of international regulations, to both test and operate their emergency distress beacons on frequencies in addition to the international 2 MHz band channel.

This software is now standard on the SG-2000. Press the shift function and emergency buttons at the same time and the distress tone will be transmitted on the displayed frequency.

Effective September 1, 1992, a special edition of the SG-2000 became available to users of the SG-2000 in Hong Kong. Certain radio programming features are deleted in order to meet Type Approval requirements of Hong Kong's G.P.O.

19

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

7.0 Planning for Installation

Before installing the SG-2000, some pre-planning based on the capabilities and features of this radio should be undertaken to ensure the best possible performance.

7.1 Location of Power Supplies

If you are installing your SG-2000 in a normal environment, such as a radio room of a ship or in a room of an office building or home, placement of the power supply is not critical as long as it is placed within 25 feet of the radio.

If you are installing the radio in a small boat, such as a cruising sailboat or an offshore fishing boat, you may wish to consider an additional gel cell (sealed) battery for radio operation. In this way, should the vessel take on water during a storm, the radio will continue to be operational.

A good way to install such a system is to place the "radio battery" in the vicinity of the radio and place an isolator between the radio battery and the rest of the battery system.

When connected to the vessel's main batteries, the radio battery will prevent the voltage drop which may develop on long cable runs and will assure peak radio performance.

7.2 Control Head Placement

One of the advantages of SG-2000 / PRC-2250-MIL ownership is that control heads may be placed anywhere within 50 meters of the radio unit. This provides a high degree of installation flexibility. Consider some of the more common civilian uses.

Marine.

On a vessel, you may want to have a control head located at the bridge, navigation station, in the cockpit of the vessel and perhaps in staterooms. If you are planning extended cruising on a typical ocean-going sailboat, usually two heads are planned, one at the navigation station and another in a watertight case in the cockpit.

This is because in most serious ocean cruising, the owner's stateroom is not used as often as the navigator's quarter berth, usually located very close to the navigation station.

Mobile.

Installation in a mobile environment is something else. If you are the only radio operator on a small four wheel drive vehicle, such as a Chevrolet Geo Tracker, which we use as a test bed for mobile systems, you will likely have a single control head and this would be mounted on the dashboard using the 5-way suction cup mount.

If your mobile installation is larger, as in a bus or large recreational vehicle, you may wish to have one control head in the rear area and another control head in the vehicle

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

20

SG-2000 MANUAL

cockpit.

Aviation.

Installation on aircraft presents an unusual challenge. In most cases, the control head is mounted separately from the radio. This allows the radio unit to be placed very close to the aircraft center of gravity.

7.3 Control Head Wiring

The control head cables which are used with the SG-2000 are designed for use in normal conditions. This means that the cables are suitable for use in mobile and fixed installations. Very high vibration environments and mounting in military situations require special precautions.

In high vibration environments, wire chaffing must be avoided. Although it will take more installation time, secure all wiring tightly to prevent movement. Once movement begins, the protective covering of wiring can be quickly worn away. This is especially true on a tug boat, for example, where vibration caused by the ship's large propeller can cause 1/8" to 1/2" vibration and rates of 10 cycles per second or more. A shaking control head wire moving even a fraction of an inch as it passes through a clamp will ultimately fail.

Military installations require a different approach. The danger here is not vibration but shrapnel. The most common methods used are either to bury the cable in a trench one half meter deep, or, if the ground is hard or rocky, to place one or more layers of sand bags over the cable.

7.4 External Speakers

The SG-2000 has no separate front panel headphone jack because the radio front panel is weather-resistant and a headphone jack is just another hole that reduces the weather resistance of the control head.

If you plan to use high impedance headphones, such as the type included in a telephone handset, you will connect these to the radio via the microphone jack. On the other hand, use of a low impedance headphone requires the use of the external speaker jack, which is present on the rear panel of the SG-2000 main unit. The J-505 jack, the external speaker jack, is also where a low-impedance Weatherfax modem may be connected.

The speaker jack on the rear of the SG-2000 is controlled like the front panel speaker.

In other words, when the SPK (speaker) is disabled on the control head, the remote speaker which is wired in parallel with control head #1 speaker is also turned off.

Important Note: The rear panel speaker is only available when the control head of the SG-2000 is attached to the radio. This is because a separate speaker audio line is run from the attached control head (where the audio amplifier is

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

21

SG-2000 MANUAL

located) to the rear panel. When the head is detached, this wiring is no longer available.

7.5 External Accessories

External accessory location should also be part of the planning process. If you are planning to add external equipment such as a Weatherfax receive modem, a terminal node controller (TNC) for amateur use, a commercial standard SITOR modem, such as the SGC TELEREX™ system, or an ALE controller such as the SGC HardLink™ System, provision for the mounting and operation of these items should be made at the time of installation.

When planning the use of an external audio input to the SG-2000, make provision for switching the external audio source on and off. This is necessary because the external audio input feeding the SG-2000 is an unswitched bridge. In order to avoid transmitting a microphone and line input signal (via J301) at the same time, you must be able to turn off the line input source.

If you are planning to use some external units, you may need to plan additional space for peripherals which may be required. As an example, the ALE controller requires a video display terminal (or IBM-PC type computer) to access programming. This may be a single unit terminal and keyboard, or it may be discrete keyboard and display units.

A TNC may require a printer, a computer, or both. Provision for mounting of these items is a good idea, especially if you will be adding them in the future.

Because of the larger number of options available, the subject of external radio peripherals is covered in more depth later in this manual.

Look ahead — and plan for your future needs before you begin your installation!

22

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

8.0 Radio Licenses

Finally, before we discuss installation of the SG-2000 radio, we should discuss licensing.

The operation of an SG-2000 generally requires two types of licensing. In the United

States, both a station license and an operator permit are issued by the Federal

Communications Commission. The SG-2000 is type accepted for use on both U.S. marine and amateur bands. Therefore it is exempt from Part 97.11 (b) regulations requiring separation of marine and ham radio equipment. Part 97.11 (b) prevents ham radio equipment from being used on commercial bands but does not preclude use of type-accepted commercial equipment on the ham bands.

8.1 Station Licenses

The U.S. F.C.C. issues licenses for the operation of many classes of radio stations. This includes ham radio stations, commercial marine shore stations, shipboard stations and those involving various kinds of mobile applications such as HF systems aboard aircraft. There is an exception, however. Stations operating under the auspices of the

U.S. military and stations in the Military Affiliate Radio System (MARS), are exempt from the licensing requirements of the F.C.C. but are subject to military rules. Most countries have comparable regulations.

Generally, the charge, if any, for filing a station application is modest. If you are planning to operate a U.S. commercial radio station, such as one aboard a fishing boat, simply call the F.C.C. Regional Office (there are 12 regional offices located in the U.S.) and ask them to send you the appropriate paperwork. Outside the U.S., check with government authorities.

The same goes for pleasure craft such as cruisers, sports fishing boats, and sailboats.

The definition of "commercial station" means that the radio can be used for conduct of

"business."

It is generally a simple process to fill out the application form for a commercial license.

You may find that you will be asked for the SG-2000 Type Acceptance number. This is not the model number of the SG-2000. It is the F.C.C.'s unique identifier which references the official testing and approval paperwork.

On the license application, where "Type Acceptance Identifier" is requested please fill in the following:

CFT8DKSG2000

23

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

If you do not plan to operate aboard a ship, but have a need to communicate with vessels on a regular commercial basis, you may qualify for a private coast station license. The U.S. F.C.C. also has licenses available for specialized needs such as long distance aviation communication.

In the United States the use of a commercial SSB station on land to communicate with vessels is not allowed without proper licensing. To make application for a U.S. shore station, you will need to complete F.C.C. forms 503, 155, and 753. The filing fee as of

1995 for form 503 is $120 while the filing fee for form 753 is $45. There is no charge for form 155, which is a form to list your filing fees. This type of license is recommended for marinas and fisheries services.

If you have a touch-tone telephone, you may order the appropriate license application forms from the F.C.C.'s automated telephone forms request service through your local office. The telephone number to call in the United States for current fee information is

(202) 418-0220.

A current printed copy of rules and regulations governing commercial marine operations is available from Fair Press Services, P.O. Box 19352, 20th Street Station,

Washington, D.C., 20036-0352. Their phone number is (202) 463-7323. There is a charge for this publication.

Amateur (ham) radio may not be used for the conduct of business and the operator of the radio station is also licensed to repair the equipment. A test must be passed in order to secure a ham radio license. Commercial stations may be serviced only by a person holding the appropriate class of commercial radio license.

8.2 Operator Licenses

In the U.S., a radio operator license is required. The person operating a commercial station aboard a pleasure craft, or any ocean going vessel under a certain tonnage, must have at least an "Operator Permit" to use the radio of an appropriately licensed vessel.

It is simple to obtain the commercial Operator Permit document. It constitutes an agreement to use the radio properly, use no profanity and to use the radio for no illegal purposes. You sign your name, give your mailing address, and a few weeks later, an operator license arrives.

If you intend repairing commercial radio equipment, the requirements become stringent very quickly. A General Class Radiotelephone License is required to make adjustments of equipment used in commercial service.

The F.C.C. has reduced the Morse Code requirements of a ham radio license and the

SG-2000 may be operated in the 10 meter amateur band with the new "Code Free" license. Information about becoming a ham radio operator in the U.S. is available by calling the National Amateur Radio Association, NARA, which maintains a toll-free

(800) telephone number.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

24

SG-2000 MANUAL

9.0 Installation

Your SG-2000/PRC-2250-MIL will provide superior communications under all conditions if you take the time to plan and install the radio equipment for maximum performance. Please read this section very carefully and implement as many of the suggestions as possible to assure a trouble free installation, a superior transmit signal, and clear reception.

This section of the manual will cover:

• General installation information and pin outs

• Control head installation and remote kits

• General comments on power supplies and antennas

• Specific mobile installation notes

• Specific marine installation suggestions

9.1 SG-2000 Rear Panel Connections

25

Protective cover secured by Philips head screws

RS-232

J-502 J-301 J-503 J-504 Ext Spk Oven

RF Output RF Ground

+ GND -

Please note that your SG-2000 is shipped with all necessary connectors for the addition of one of our Smartuner™ couplers and for installation of peripherals via the audio input/output jack on the rear panel. You will see the connectors when you loosen the

Philips head screws which hold the protective sheet metal cover over the rear panel connectors and remove the cover.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

From left to right, these jacks provide the following:

J-502

J-301

SG-230/SG-235 Smartuner™ connections

Aux. Audio input/output and PTT line

J-503

J-504

Remote control head or multiple head junction box

Remote control head or multiple head junction box (Head mounted on radio is normally connected here.

Ext Spk

External Speaker (or Weatherfax modem)

Oven

Turns oven On-Off (Shipped with oven ON as default)

Pin outs of the external coupler jack and the Audio Input/Output jack are listed below.

These may also be found in the SG-2000 Technical Reference in appropriate schematics.

9.2 External Coupler Installation

Connector J-502 is used to connect the SG-2000 to an external coupler. Details are shown in the diagram below:

J-502

26

Coupler Connections on rear panel of SG-2000

1 2 3

©1995, SGC, Inc.

J-502 Pin 1: Coupler Ground. (Black wire from SG-230/SG-235)

Pin 2: Coupler +12 VDC. (Red wire from SG-230/SG-235)

Pin 3: Remote Tuned Indicator (Black/White wire from

SG-230/SG-235)

Do not connect the Red/White wire from the SG-230/SG-235 as this wire is used to control coupler functions. See SG-230/SG-235 manuals for details on coupler control options via this wire.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

9.2 External Modem, Weatherfax and High Seas Direct™

Connector J301 is used to connect the SG-2000 to an external modem. Details are shown in the diagram below:

J-301

SG-2000 Rear panel connections for external modems, Telerex™ and

Weatherfax

1 2 3 4

27

Pin 1: Audio input (600 ohm impedance) (From modem audio out)

Pin 2: Ground

Pin 3: Audio output (600 ohm impedance) (To medem audio input)

Pin 4: Push-To-Talk line (PTT line on modem if available)

Weather fax modems: Connect Ground from modem to Pin 2 and audio input to modem to Pin 3 of J-301. (Weather fax modems may also be connected to the external speaker jack.) See Appendix for High Seas Direct connections. See page 61 for connection to ALE controller and serial devices.

9.3 Continuous Duty Ratings

If you are planning to use your radio for intermittent voice communications, continuous duty ratings are of no consequence. However, if you are planning to transmit for long periods of time on a frequent basis, you should consider the duty cycle and continuous ratings of components, ordering heavy duty cooling options if necessary.

Duty cycle is a simple concept. If you are dealing with speech and you will be transmitting about one quarter of the time, then the duty cycle of equipment is about

50%. However, if you are planning extended broadcast of information, speaking or sending hours of information such as using a transceiver in the ARQ data transmission mode, then continuous duty ratings are required.

All SGC equipment is conservatively rated. We use commercial service ratings for all of our equipment and make continuous service available upon request. Continuous

Service is primarily a matter of adding additional cooling to a unit, as heat is the culprit in most component failures when equipment is used in continuous service.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

SGC Part Number 51-81 is an internal fan option which consists of a muffin type fan which is controlled by a temperature sensor inside the radio. With the fan on, air enters the bottom of the radio and is exhausted through a special louvered top cover and slots on the rear panel.

28

When using the continuous duty option on the SG-2000, power output is limited to 110-

120 watts continuous. Maintain an unrestricted air flow area of at least 1 inch around all surfaces of the radio.

SGC Part Number 52-90 (Rack mount kit for SG-2000) has fans built in and is also suited for continuous duty operation. Field installation instructions for the rack mount follow.

Note: If you are using your SG-2000 in continuous duty operation, you must be certain that the power supply you plan to use is suited to continuous operation. We recommend the SGC PS-30 or PS-50 power supplies, Part Numbers

53-04 and 53-05, for continuous duty commercial service.

9.4 Rack Mount Kit Installation (Part No. 52-90)

The SG-2000 may be mounted in a standard 19" equipment rack. This installation may be performed in the field using the following procedure:

©1995, SGC, Inc.

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Philips Screwdriver #2 Point

Philips Screwdriver #1 Point

Nut Driver 1/4"

Flat Blade Screwdriver 1/8"

Nut Driver 5/16"

Open End Wrench 1/4"

Flat Blade Screwdriver 3/8"

Open End Wrench 7/16"

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

None

CAUTIONS:

• Power must be disconnected from radio.

• Do not over tighten screws which will strip heads.

Installation Procedure

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

©1995, SGC, Inc. a. b. c. d.

Remove top cover-secured by six black #6 Philips Head screws-set cover and screws aside.

Remove bottom cover-secured by six black #6 Philips Head screws-set cover and screws aside.

Remove rear panel connector cover-secured by three #4

Philips Head screws-set cover and screws aside.

Remove rear panel control head cable clamp-secured by one

#4 Philips Head screw-set screw and clamp aside.

Unplug control head cable connector (10-position) from rear panel.

Remove control head as follows:

Remove two #6 Philips Flathead screws from either side panel (located towards front of radio)

Remove two #6 Philips Flathead screws from other side panel (located towards front of radio)

Lift control head cable up and out of cable U-Channel.

Gently pull control head/cable assembly forward-set this assembly aside.

Install the fan option connector assembly supplied by plugging the connector into J16 with the Green wire to Pin 1.

Set the radio (upside up) into the tray assembly. Rear of radio should face power cables.

Lift the rear of the radio (if necessary) and install the DC power wires to the radio DC terminal strip; red to "+", black to "-" set radio back down (if necessary).

Secure radio to bottom cover. Use four #6 black Philips

Head screws removed in step #2.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

29

11.

12.

13.

17.

18.

©1995, SGC, Inc. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

SG-2000 MANUAL

Install RF ground jumper braid onto radio rear panel RF ground bolt.

Install RF coax jumper into radio rear panel RF in/out connector-set the radio/tray assembly aside.

Install the control head rear panel as follows;

Unplug the control head cable connector (10-position) from the control head display board assembly-set the cable assembly aside.

Remove either head mounting bracket by removing two

Philips Head screws.

Remove other head mounting bracket by removing two

Philips Head screws.

Install the four longer threaded stand-offs, SGC part # 965-

913 (supplied), into the inserts from which the screws were removed in steps B and C above.

Replace four #4 Philips Head microprocessor assembly mounting screws with the four shorter threaded stand-offs,

SGC part #965-908 (supplied).

Remove control head connector (10-position) from control head cable.

Pass the control head cable through the Heyco watertight fitting on the control head rear panel (supplied). Do not tighten the Heyco.

Re-install connector removed in Step F (see illustration supplied).

Install control head connector onto control head display board assembly (from step A)

Attach control head rear panel to control head using eight #4

Philips Flathead screws (supplied).

Tighten Heyco

Attach control head assembly to rack mount front panel using four each #8 nuts (supplied attached to control head rear panel).

Attach control head/front panel assembly to tray assembly using 7 each #4 lock washers and #4 nuts (supplied attached

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

30

SG-2000 MANUAL

to front panel)

31

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

19.

SG-2000 MANUAL

Re-install control head cable connector (10-position) into rear panel (from step #5)

20.

21.

22.

Re-install cable clamp using one #4 Philips Head screws

(from step #4).

Re-install rear panel connector cover using three #4 Philips

Head screws (from step #3).

Install louvered top cover (supplied) using six #6 black

Philips Head screws (from step 2).

This concludes the Rack Mount Retrofit Procedure.

9.5 Control Head Installations

The SG-2000 is a multiple control head radio. There are two ways to obtain a remote head configuration. First is to remove the control head supplied on the SG-2000.

Second is to plug in additional control heads. While most people order their SG-2000 with the Remote Head Kit installed, this item may be installed in the field through the following procedure:

9.6 Remote Head Kit Installation (Part No. 04-12)

As supplied, the SG-2000 comes with a control panel attached to the front of the radio.

As an option, a remote head kit, part number 04-12 may be installed, extending the control head 16 feet from the radio and supplying a gimbal mount. Installation takes 10 minutes.

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Philips Head Screwdriver

TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

None

CAUTIONS:

• Power must be disconnected from radio for this procedure.

• Use care not to over tighten screws and strip threads.

I

nstallation Procedure

1.

2.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

Locate and remove the wiring shield on the back of the SG-2000. This shield, which runs horizontally across the back of the radio, is held in place by three Phillips head screws. Unplug the control head number

1 cable.

Locate and remove the six black Phillips head screws which secure the top cover to the SG-2000 and remove the top cover. Two screws are located on each side of the radio and two screws are located on the top

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

32

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

SG-2000 MANUAL

of the radio.

Turn radio upside down on a stable surface. Remove the six screws which hold the bottom cover of the SG-2000 and remove the bottom cover. Two screws are located on each side of the radio and two screws are located on the bottom of the radio.

Turn radio right side up.

Locate and remove four Phillips head screws which hold the control head in place. (Two on each side.)

Carefully slide the control head forward to remove it from the radio body.

Remove control head cable from wire race in radio body. Remove external speaker jack feed. Note: External speaker jack only functions if a head is attached to SG-2000 body.

Turn radio upside down. Reinstall bottom cover. Secure with six

Phillips head screws.

Turn radio right side up. Install top cover and secure with six Phillips head screws.

(Optional: Install Remote head in desired location and route cable to radio unit.)

Plug remote control head into rear panel connector of SG-2000.

Carefully install cable shield over the control wire and secure shield with three Phillips head screws. Cable clamp on left side of rear panel is not used with external control head.

Installation of the remote control head is now complete.

33

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

9.7 Additional Control Heads (Part No. 04-11)

Additional control heads may be added to the SG-2000 via the 10-pin connector located under the protective cover on the rear panel of the radio. In the event more than one additional control head is desired, a junction box is used. Please refer to the following diagram:

REAR PANEL CONNECTION FOR ADDITIONAL CONTROL HEADS

SG-2000

Rear

J-503

34

Single control head

Junction Box for Additional Control Heads

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

9.8 Remote Head Cable Extension

In the event that you need to extend the length of the control cable on the head of an

SG-2000, two steps need to occur:

First

, you have to remove the control head from the radio. The procedure above will allow you to remove the control head.

Second

, you need to replace the existing cable with a longer one.

The cable which connects the SG-2000 to the control head(s) is attached to the units using standard connectors at each end. In this manner, the length of the control cable may be easily changed. Carefully unplug the existing cable assembly from the control head and radio and replace it with the desired length.

While we recommend that you use the control head wiring supplied by SGC, you may use any other 10-conductor shielded wiring. Remember, however, that the length of the cable run to a remote head is partly determined by the quality of wiring used. If you use very small conductors and try to exceed the 50 meter RS-422 standard distance, you may be disappointed. If, on the other hand, you choose suitably large conductors, (#18 or larger), you will achieve excellent results beyond 50 meters.

35

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

10.0 Power Supplies

Many power sources can be used with the SG-2000. Among these are:

• Transformer or regulated power supplies from AC mains

• Battery systems

• Solar Systems

• Wind Powered Systems

All modern transceivers run on 12 Volts DC. With the exception of AC mains power supplies, all other systems supply DC suitable to run a radio. However, various regulators may be necessary, because regulation of solar and wind powered systems is difficult.

Another important consideration, how power is moved from the power supply to the radio, can have a very high impact on ultimate radio performance, especially when transmitting.

10.1 Cabling

Regardless of the type of power supply used, you should design cabling from the power supply to the radio to minimize voltage drop. This drop occurs because wire is not a perfect conductor of electricity. The longer the distance between a power supply and a radio, the greater the voltage drop will be.

SGC recommends placing a power supply no more than 25 feet from a radio. There are two reasons for this:

First

. The voltage drop experienced over 25 feet, even when large conductor cabling is used, is not acceptable.

Second

. The longer the power cabling, the more chance that it will fail due to any number of unforeseen circumstances.

When electricity flows from the power supply to the radio at low current levels, the internal resistance of the wire has little effect. But as current increases, the voltage drop becomes more pronounced.

Now apply that to your power wiring: turn on the radio at a low power level, such as the receive mode where little power is drawn, and things will likely be just fine with number 16 or number 14 wire at 25 feet; but turn on the transmitter, where lots of

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

36

SG-2000 MANUAL

power is drawn, and nothing may work correctly because the voltage will drop dramatically.

Let's consider wire sizes between the power source and the radio. At 25 feet we recommend number 6 wire. At 12 feet we also recommend number 6. At 2 feet we recommend number 8, but we use number 6 because its more in line with our practice of building generous margins into all SGC products.

10.2 AC Power Supplies

There are two ways to convert high voltages AC from either 110 or 220 Volts to DC voltages suitable for operation of an HF radio, generally 12 Volts DC: conventional transformer-rectifier power supplies and switching type power supplies.

SGC does not recommend switching type power supplies for continuous commercial service for two reasons: First, unless the switching power supply is of exceptional design and properly installed, it will generate RF “hash” which will create a high local noise level. Second, switching type power supplies of inferior design are not as capable of continuous duty operation.

Some switching power supplies are quite good. Unfortunately, they are also very expensive and not as cost effective as a transformer-rectifier type power supply.

10.3 Transformer-Rectifier Supplies

Transformer-rectifier power supplies are by far the most reliable available. They are able to operate over a wide range of input voltages and offer resistance to failure under periodic overload conditions which would cause a switching type supply to fail.

Supply voltages for such power supplies are generally 110 and 220 volts AC with a frequency of either 50 or 60 Hz. Many aircraft also have 400 Hz AC available from their engine-driven alternators, but in these instances, it is usually better to power equipment from 24 volts (generally available on aircraft) than install a power supply to operate equipment from the 400 Hz AC power source.

High peak current is an important consideration if you are planning to operate in the voice mode. But if you are planning to operate in the data mode or will be using the transmitter on a more continuous basis, output capacity is less a factor than how heavily-built the transformer in the power supply is.

SGC does not generally recommend switching type power supplies in either a mobile or a base station installation for these two reasons: first, switching power supplies easily generate noise from the switching circuitry; second, under heavy loads, the switching type power supplies tend to stall and cause an interruption of power to your radio.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

37

SG-2000 MANUAL

10.4 Mobile Power Supplies

In virtually all mobile power supplies, the source of power is the alternator or generator system of a vehicle and the battery. There are several principals of good design that come into play in the mobile environment which you should consider when going mobile on HF.

First, HF takes a lot of power on transmit. While you can use a single battery to power both the vehicle and the radio, SGC recommends the installation of an additional battery in all cases where this is practical. The reason for this is that the output voltage from a battery drops as the load increases. The more reserve current capacity, the lower the voltage drop under high intermittent power demands.

Some vehicles operate on 24 volt power in the mobile and marine services. There are two approaches which can be taken. First, you can put in a 24 volt to 12 volt converter.

This is usually expensive. A much less expensive approach is to look for a 24 volt system which uses two 12 volt batteries in series. If you are fortunate to find this type of installation, simply use the 12 volt battery which has its negative post tied to ground and the positive lug at 12 volts above ground. Never use the battery on the other half!

In mobile operations, the biggest problem you will run into will be noise. While noise sources are easily found in fixed locations, in the mobile environment, including marine applications, noise sources may vary depending on engine speed and other variables.

Mobile power sources are notoriously noisy. Generators and alternators are only part of the problem which you will encounter. The presence of ignition sources including the coil, distributor and the spark plugs complicates matters. The best solution is to use a diesel engine and eliminate the ignition issue entirely.

When you are installing an HF system in a mobile setting, one of the best pieces of troubleshooting equipment you'll find is a small portable AM broadcast band transistor radio. With this radio, tuned to the highest end of its range (usually around 1600 KHz), you can use it as a hand-held noise probe to quickly identify sources of noise.

Good design practice dictates putting capacitors across the alternator or generator output and across the primary leads to the coil/distributor and at fans and other electrically operated devices. We've even found cases where power windows in a vehicle would cause RF “hash” on receive. The point is that you almost never have too many capacitors.

Ignition wire can be both a source of grief and a source of joy, depending on the vehicle.

Most vehicles in North America come with resistor-type ignition wiring. This wiring has about 10 K ohms of resistance from the distributor to the spark plug. If you have a vehicle with solid ignition wiring and you experience RF “hash,” a 10 K ohm, 10 watt

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

38

SG-2000 MANUAL

resistor in series with the ignition wire and installed at the distributor will usually help matters.

When you are tracking down ignition noise near a gasoline engine, you may find that the distributor is a major source of noise. Generally, you can't use capacitors to reduce noise from a distributor because the noise is coming from the spark generated for ignition. Adding enough capacitance to change the rise time of the spark voltage to a lower value which will reduce RF “hash” delays the time the spark will gap inside the engine. This means that timing will be changed (delayed) if a purely capacitive answer is sought.

Here, shielding of the distributor and wiring is likely to be the best answer. Even when you put shielding on the outside of ignition wires, you create a capacitor. Depending on the type of ignition system and the length of the spark plug wires, you may find timing retarded to the point that an engine will not deliver good performance without adjustment of timing.

10.5 Solar Powered Chargers

Not much needs to be said about solar charging systems except that good design practice needs to be followed to provide operation under all conditions which are expected to be encountered.

The most critical element in design of an HF solar power system is local weather conditions. If you are designing a solar system for an area where there will be little sunlight for many days in a row, then a large battery system will be needed along with additional solar panels. On the other hand, if you are designing for an area where there is a lot of sunshine at all times of the year, then you will need fewer panels; in some cases two 53-watt panels and one good gel cell battery will be sufficient.

Seasonality is also a consideration. Obviously, in the high Arctic, solar power is ideal for the month or two during the year when the sun never goes down. But in the other months, solar power is not a good idea. Hence, another consideration should be latitude where a solar system will be installed and a calculation of the number of hours of daylight which will be available.

The kind of regulator which is selected to control the output of the solar panel(s) is very important. It should operate over a wide range of loads and should continue to provide trickle charging to keep the battery system charged to its fullest between operating sessions.

39

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

11.0 Antenna Systems

The function of an antenna is to couple radio energy into space and the most important factor in considering an antenna is to realize an inescapable law of physics: big antennas are capable of doing a better job of coupling energy into space than are small antennas at any given frequency.

The single most important formula to know in dealing with antennas is that the size of a

1/2 wavelength dipole antenna is:

468 divided by the frequency in Megahertz.

(468/F MHz = 1/2 Wave in feet)

The second most important fact to remember is that, due to space considerations, often- times the size of a MF or an HF antenna is a quarter wavelength.

This means for example that at 10 MHz (The frequency of the US National Bureau of

Standards time and frequency standard stations WWV and WWVH) a half wavelength is 46.8 feet and a quarter wavelength is 23.4 feet. By the same token a broadcast station at 1 MHz (1000 KHz) has a quarter wavelength of 234 feet while a quarter wavelength at 100 MHz in the FM broadcast band is only 2.34 feet.

An antenna does not have to be a physical quarter wavelength in order to work efficiently: shortened antennas can be used. But any time an antenna is less than a physical quarter wavelength it will not have as much gain — or efficiency of coupling energy into space — as will a larger antenna. Use of a high performance antenna coupler, such as an SG-230 Smartuner™, Smartuner™ Pro, or SG-235, will improve performance of all antennas dramatically.

Short antennas represent some compromise. However, in many cases they can give good performance, especially in applications such as mobile HF work and in loops which are used where space is limited and noise levels are high. In other words, there are antennas which will provide performance better than a quarter wavelength antenna for a specific application.

Antenna length is not the only consideration. Another important factor is antenna wire size

40

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

11.1 Antenna Wire Size

Antennas are working their best when current in the antenna is high. A large wire will radiate more efficiently than a small wire.

Stranded wires will also radiate better than solid wires. Because AC electrical voltages are carried by the surface of a wire, stranded wire has more surface area and therefore radiates more efficiently.

If you wanted to design a good half wavelength antenna for HF work, you would select the largest wire possible because you know that at power levels of 150 watts and up, the difference between number 14 wire and number 6 wire can be as much as 3 dB.

This means that just changing the wire size can double the effective radiated power coming from an antenna.

If you want to get the effect of a higher power transmitter, just increase the size of antenna wire. You can easily make a 150 watt radio perform like a 300 watt radio.

Another consideration with any antenna is the size and location of the counterpoise, the electrical “mirror” of an antenna. In the case of a center-fed dipole, it is the "cold" end of the dipole. On a vertical antenna, it is the ground system or the metal of a vehicle which is acting as a mirror. The counterpoise must be larger than the antenna or the system will not radiate effectively.

If you are ever working on an HF radio and you get RF “bites” when your hand touches the equipment or your lips touch a metallic microphone, you likely have a situation where the antenna is electrically "bigger" than the ground or counterpoise and so the counterpoise is radiating.

The height of an antenna over ground or counterpoise varies by the kind of antenna which is in use because this determines the take-off angle of the radiated signal. This is not an issue with vertical antennas as much as with horizontally mounted antennas.

In a vertical antenna the ground, or counterpoise, is parallel to the surface of the earth.

Since the maximum radiation from vertical antennas is shaped something like a donut with a pencil through it with the pencil representing the antenna, you can see how the ground (which would slice the donut shaped RF pattern horizontally) would have little effect on take-off angle.

When you turn the antenna (yes, and that donut and pencil) over on its side to represent a horizontally mounted antenna, the donut becomes two half donuts lying on the surface of the earth. The take off angle

which is the amount of energy going toward the horizon — is lowered as the horizontal antenna moves up from ground level. The angle approaches its minimum one wavelength or more above ground.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

41

SG-2000 MANUAL

There are also some other effects on antenna performance when it is raised up from ground. At low levels, down close to the ground, an antenna will exhibit a certain impedance (usually lower than at higher elevations). As a dipole antenna is moved up from the ground, it will go to a higher impedance until it settles at between 50 and 72 ohms at one wavelength over the ground.

Radio signals are polarized. This means that a signal coming from a vertical antenna will be best received by a vertical antenna, provided that the antennas are of equal gain.

This means that even though a quarter wavelength vertical will likely be heard at distance better on a similar vertical than on a horizontal dipole antenna, a horizontal antenna array with substantial gain, such as a log periodic beam, will receive the signal better than either the vertical or horizontal dipole. Antenna gain is the best investment you can make because it works for you both in the transmit mode and in the receive mode.

A couple of other comments about polarization: most of the noises which you hear from over the horizon are vertically polarized so a horizontally polarized antenna will be quieter. And there are, in addition, circularly polarized antennas such as large delta loop antennas on low frequencies and quad type loops on the higher HF frequencies.

11.2 Near Vertical Incidence Skywave

Not all HF SSB work is done at transcontinental or intercontinental range. There is often a need to operate at close-in distances of less than 400 km. HF can provide a good solution for this type of communications. The technique is called Near Vertical Incident

Skywave propagation (NVIS).

The NVIS antenna works on principles opposite those which lead to good long distance communications. Instead of sending maximum signal toward the horizon to hit the ionosphere at a shallow angle hundreds of miles away, the objective in NVIS antennas is to bounce almost straight up and come back down. While this antenna works great in the daytime and at short distances, it is very poor at night or when longer distances are being attempted.

NVIS antennas are generally low frequency antennas which operate from 2 to 7 MHz.

The effect on performance of NVIS and groundwave radiation at these frequencies can only be established over a period of several days and several nights of operating.

11.3 Base Station and Fixed Antennas

With the discussion of some basic antenna principles in mind, you must decide what kind of antenna to install for a fixed station. If distances to be communicated are long, say over 1,000 Km, then a low angle of radiation is desired. The antennas which work best for these purposes are either vertical antennas, dipoles oriented so that their major lobe is in the desired direction (dipole lobes are perpendicular to the wire axis), or beam antennas.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

42

SG-2000 MANUAL

At closer distances, inverted “L” wire antennas with a suitable high efficiency coupler such as an SG-230 work very well. Dipoles, folded dipoles, and any other efficient 50 ohm antenna will work well at distances up to 1,000 Km.

Loop antennas are best for receiving because they are quieted by presenting a short circuit to local noise pulses from industrial and commercial sources. But loop antennas need to be very large at low frequencies to radiate efficiently.

The basic design rule for all fixed antennas is “If you have real estate — use it.” The bigger the antenna — within reason — the more effective the antenna will be. Also, except for NVIS applications, the higher the antenna, the better.

11.4 Antenna Feed Lines

You have to get power from the transmitter or transceiver to an antenna. To do this you need a transmission line. A lot of “old timers” in HF believe to this day that high impedance feedlines are best, but science doesn't agree with that point of view.

High impedance feedlines worked so well in the “old days” because tube type transmitters had a final amplifier impedance of between 5,000 and 10,000 ohms.

Matching 5,000 ohms to a 500 ohm feedline meant a transformation of 10 to 1 — a simple task for a transformer — which is what the output section of a transmitter is.

Changing the match to 50 ohm lines meant the matching transformer had to match 100 to 1 — a more difficult chore with the opportunity for a lot more loss if everything wasn't properly adjusted.

With the advent of solid state radio equipment, the rules turned upside down. Now, a final transistor LPA (Linear Power Amplifier) impedance runs in the neighborhood of 1 to 2 ohms. This means that a 500 ohm line would be a 1- to -500 or 1- to -250 match — and not very good odds of getting things just right. The 50 ohm feedline represents a 1- to -25 or a 1- to -50 match — which is easily and safely designed.

Given this little bit of history, if you do not have the luxury of having a transmitter right at the antenna site — and this usually only happens in the case of AM broadcast band

Medium Wave transmitters — then the best way to get RF from point "A" to point "B" is via 50 ohm impedance coaxial cable.

43

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

11.5 Antenna Couplers

If the transmitter and the feedline are both 50 ohms and the antenna is 100 ohms, a mismatch will occur. A portion of the power coming from the transmitter which should be radiated by the antenna will be "reflected" back toward the transmitter. As this occurs, standing waves develop on the feedline. The ratio of the peak voltage going to the antenna and the measured peak voltage reflected back to the transmitter by an unmatched condition is called Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR).

When a VSWR (SWR for short) exceeds about 2 to 1, the HF transmitter will reduce power to reduce stress on components. Reflected power has nowhere to go but to be turned into heat. This heat can be dissipated by the coax feedline or it can be dissipated by components in the output circuit of a transmitter. Either way, one of the rules of HF equipment is “heat is bad!” So it is in SWR considerations.

You can reduce SWR either by changing the length of the antenna or by introducing a matching network which will precisely match the conditions of the antenna to the requirements of the feedline: an antenna coupler.

If the SWR presented by an antenna is less than 2— to —1, the addition of an antenna coupler will make only a modest improvement in the transfer of energy. If the SWR exceeds 2 to 1, however, the results can be dramatic from this one piece of equipment.

One of the problems with earlier coupler designs was that the coupler was either a manual tuning device, such as a series of capacitors and roller inductors which had knobs and cranks on them, or the job was handled by large servo-motors which read voltages and made adjustments accordingly. But neither of these approaches was good enough for the new technology which has become available and which includes the next generation of adaptive HF radio controllers.

So SGC began to build computer controlled antenna couplers including the SG-230 and

SG-235 Smartuner™ couplers. SGC began building the servo-motor type automatic couplers in 1975 so the transition to a computerized coupler with extremely fast retune times was a logical development. The SGC Smartuner™ is widely acknowledged as the finest antenna coupler available. We encourage you to use a Smartuner™ with the SG-

2000 because few antennas will provide an even load over the wide range of frequencies covered by the SG-2000.

11.6 Mobile Antennas

The standard whip antenna used in the HF environment has a brief but interesting history related to the Citizen's Band radio craze which swept the United States in the

1970's. The "generic" 108 inch long stainless steel whip, while it could be mounted in such a way as to operate at 27 MHz without any coils, traps or matching network, it is

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

44

SG-2000 MANUAL

not generally well built and may fail when used in commercial service because of its poor base insulation and its lack of a shock absorbing base. It just whips around and doesn't stay where it belongs.

Single element commercial heavy duty antennas such as those made by Hustler are a step in the right direction for lower frequency HF work. Although some companies still sell 108" stainless steel whip-based products, the professional HF person will always choose a center or top loaded whip antenna if a single frequency is to be used.

When a series of frequencies spread across the spectrum is to be used, the professional answer is either to put up with changing loading coils or to put in a continuously loaded helically-wound antenna. This provides a reasonable load to a good antenna coupler at all frequencies from about 1.8 to 30 MHz.

SGC is the only manufacturer to add the good attributes of a 108" whip (which performs well at the 20 MHz range and above) with the high performance of a helical antenna that performs well at the lower frequencies.

The use of an antenna coupler is required on all but the most carefully matched center- and top-loaded mobile whip antennas which present close to a 50 ohm match to the antenna lead.

Although it is tempting to use both a coupler and a center loaded antenna, the center loading element of a loaded antenna already acts as an RF choke at high frequencies.

Thus, it actually reduces the effective length of an antenna if used on a high band.

11.7 QMS Recommended for Mobile Use

SGC engineers have discovered that the QMS-II antenna system, comprising an SGC coupler (the SG-230 Smartuner™ or the two new couplers — the SG-230 Smartuner™

Pro and the SG-235) mounted in a QMS and driving the SG-303 high performance whip antenna will typically yield substantial improvement in gain over a conventional 1.8 to

30 MHz HF mobile antenna installation. When we start making claims of 20 dB, a lot of people (maybe even you) will be skeptical. So let us show you how you can get a significant increase in gain by simply using a QMS compared with any other 1.8 to 30

MHz system:

1. Most antennas are so heavy that they are mounted on the bumper of a vehicle.

Because of this location, about a third of the antenna

is less than a foot from the grounded bod

y

sheet metal

. This is equivalent to a capacitor of 25 to 100 pico Farads shorting your antenna. QMS, mounted high on the side of the vehicle, gains 3 to 6 dB.

2. Body sheet metal prevents the antenna from radiating evenly. It shields the signal in certain directions and causes

distorted radiation lobes

. QMS gains another 3 to 6 dB.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

45

SG-2000 MANUAL

3. If an antenna coupler is mounted in the trunk of a vehicle, it will have 1 to 2 feet of

HV cable going to the antenna on the outside. With as short as a 1-foot lead wire, and using a 9-foot antenna, this means that fully

10% of the antenna system is inside the vehicle

where it won't transmit or receive. It also creates another 10 to 100 pico

Farads of capacitance which results in more losses! With QMS, you'll pick up 3-6 dB.

4. Wire size of the antenna counts. Almost the resonant type antennas are wound with number 22 wire. The SG-303, the antenna used with the QMS, is wound with

3 millimeter wide tape wire strap — equivalent to AWG # 4 wire. With a 100-watt class transceiver, you'll develop 3 to 7 amps (or more) of RF on the antenna, and

7 amps through #22 wire represents major losses.

The QMS with the SG-303 antenna scores another 3-6 dB advantage.

5. The SG-303, is actually

two antennas in a single casing

. A single rod equivalent to the conventional stainless steel whip element resonates at about 22 MHz; plus a helically wound element resonates at about 10 MHz. This means that on lower frequencies, those under 20 MHz or so, the SG-303 will vastly outperform a conventional 9 foot whip. Chalk up several more dB for QMS.

6. Some hams use the so-called “antenna tuner” built into some radios and feed their antennas directly with coax. The problem is that with a non-resonant antenna, a very high SWR exists on the feedline between the radio and antenna even if you get a low SWR reading with a built in tuner.

Built-in tuners are nothing more than trimmers.

The QMS system puts a true coupler right at the antenna. When your feedline SWR is above 4 to 1 you have effectively put 29 pico Farads per foot capacitance to ground! That's at least 3 to 6 dB more gain for QMS!

GAIN ADVANTAGE USING QMS!

As you can see, our gain advantage of 20 dB for QMS is pretty conservative! Here's one more thing to remember: QMS

mounts without drilling any holes

in your vehicle. That's a major advantage at vehicle trade-in time. So, if you're planning to use HF while mobile,

SGC's QMS system is the best solution you'll find.

Contact your SGC dealer or call SGC direct.

11.8 Unconventional Mobile Antennas

In HF mobile work, there are as many antenna alternatives as there are experienced HF installers.

The "J" antenna is perhaps best described as a bar rail type affair insulated from the top of a van, truck, or other flat roofed vehicle.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

46

SG-2000 MANUAL

Loop antennas are similar, except that they will go all the way around the top of a vehicle and will have one side grounded to the coupler ground while the other side will be connected to the "hot" antenna lead at the insulator.

A variation on the "J" antenna is something called a "shunt fed" antenna, like a towel bar; it is used by some of our clients on aircraft and on top of various vehicles which have special communications requirements.

Other antennas which may be used successfully on HF may be found in the SG-230

Smartuner manual. We highly recommend the use of one of our Smartuners™ for all

HF installations where practical.

47

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

12.0 Operating the SG-2000

Now with licenses, power supply, and antenna out of the way, let's get to the SG-2000 and its features.

This portion of the manual is divided into three sections: syntax, front panel diagram, and key functions.

Key functions are loosely grouped into two categories, basic and advanced. Basic key functions do not require the use of the Shift/Function keys. Advanced operations do require the use of the Shift/Function keys and may involve several key strokes.

The SG-2000 is a very sophisticated piece of equipment which may be operated on either a very simple level or may be used in a very complex manner. Please take time to read this portion of the manual carefully as it will assure satisfactory operation of the equipment for many years to come.

12.1 Syntax

The major differences between the SG-2000 and many other radios on the market are

Memory, Channel, Frequency and Memory Bank.

The SG-2000 has a massive memory: Information on 744 channels may be programmed and the major difference between the SG-2000 memory and other radios is that the SG-

2000 uses a more complicated memory table. While most radios can assign frequencies and modes to any memory position, the SG-2000 architecture goes one step further by allowing assignment of a channel number to any memory.

This means that in a conventional SSB radio, memory number 55 may be programmed to be KMI on ITU channel 403, so that any time this channel was needed, you would have to remember that KMI 403 is Memory #55 on your conventional radio.

The SG-2000 resolves this problem by allowing up to four digits to be used to identify a memory position. Hence, the memory position associated with KMI on ITU channel

403 is stored as memory 403.

We can't overstate the significance of this point. It is one of the reasons that conventional ham radio equipment is not suited to serious offshore use. Suppose that the radio operator with the ham ticket falls overboard on a cruise. Now the persons left aboard, who may not be hams, have to figure out how to run the radio.

With a ham radio type memory, they would have to know where, among the typical

100 memories, were programmed the frequencies for KMI.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

48

SG-2000 MANUAL

With an SG-2000, all you need to figure out is where the power switch is and know enough to hit the channel button until four dashes appear ( - - - - ), punch in 403 (the channel number desired) and press the channel button again to select the frequency.

From this point, the radio will do the rest. You should know that when an SG-2000 is turned on, the speaker volume automatically comes up to a usable level. And if you are using one of our Smartuners™, it handles the antenna adjustments automatically.

Throughout this manual, we will be using the following terms:

"

Memory"

refers to the SG-2000 memory — the electronic box full of information.

"Channel"

refers to the pre-programmed international standard channels which are permanently etched into the SG-2000 at the factory along with our own 65-channel collection of ham band edges which are also included.

"

User Memory"

refers to the user definable positions which you should think of as channels 1 through 99.

"Scan Bank #"

refers to one of up to six banks of up to 10 channels each which may be assigned at user discretion.

"

Programmed Scan"

refers to scanning of the contents of the various scan banks or operating in the band scanning mode.

"

Channel Scan"

refers to a sequential scan of channels.

"Frequency Scan"

refers to scanning up or down from a certain frequency.

"Band Scan"

refers to scanning a range of frequencies defined by a lower and upper limit. This may also be referred to as bracketed scanning defined by an upper frequency and lower frequency.

Again, "Channels" has two meanings:

• A channel is a memory reference number assigned to a particular frequency.

• It also may be the ITU channel designator number.

User memories have numbers 1 through 99.

One other important concept related to memory is that the SG-2000 handles assignment of information based on channel number. This means that when you wish to delete a channel, you must handle deletion from the channel display, not the frequency display.

49

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

One other question that comes up from mariners from time to time is why some manufacturers refer to HF channels as “6A,” “4B,” and so forth. The “A” stands for the first simplex channel within a particular marine radio band when counted from lowest to highest frequency. Channel 6A would be ITU channel number 650 on a simplex frequency of 6215.0 KHz. This is also the 6 MHz band Distress frequency. Similarly, channel 4B would be 4146.0 KHz, the second simplex frequency on the 4 MHz band better known as ITU channel 451.

Channels 1-99 displayed on the SG-2000 are user defined.

Channels 100-200 may be factory assigned.

Channel numbers over 200 refer to the official ITU channel number .

12.2 Front Panel

The front panel of the control head of the SG-2000 radio is shown in the picture below.

The next section, Key Functions, refers to the keys on this picture.

50

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

12.3 Push-Button Functions

BASIC FUNCTIONS

Power ON/OFF

Press POWER

Monitor 2182 KHz

NOTE:

When you first turn on the SG-2000, it will automatically switch to the last frequency used.

Press EMER

51

Send Emergency ALARM

Press EMER

+

SHIFT/FUNC

WARNING:

Do not test this function unless you are operating the SG-2000 into a properly shielded dummy load. Otherwise, authorities such as the U.S. Coast

Guard may begin a search effort.

Increase Volume

Clarifier

Press Up Arrow to increase or Down Arrow to decrease volume

Press CLAR then Up Arrow or Down Arrow

600 Hz

NOTE: The Clarifier (receiver offset) has a range of +/-

Display Frequency

Press FREQ

Display Channel

Press CHAN

Change Channel

Press CHAN

until 4 dashes appear, enter channel number,

CHAN

EXAMPLE:

To call KMI on channel 401 press: CHAN , 401

, CHAN

FREQUENCY FUNCTIONS

Enter a SIMPLEX Frequency

Press PRGM , FREQ

enter frequency

, PRGM

©1995, SGC, Inc.

NOTE:

When a programming sequence begins with PRGM, you must press PRGM at the end of

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

the key sequence to execute the sequence.

EXAMPLE:

To enter the simplex frequency 3920.5 KHz, you would

Press PRGM , FREQ 39205 PRGM

Enter a DUPLEX Frequency

Press PRGM , FREQ

enter receive frequency

FREQ

enter mode

FREQ enter transmit frequency PRGM

EXAMPLE:

To enter the duplex frequency 3920.5 KHz receive,

3815.3 KHz transmit and Lower Sideband, you would press:

PRGM , FREQ

39205 FREQ 1 FREQ 38153 PRGM

Increment Frequency

NOTE:

The 1 key toggles selection of LSB or USB in this example.

Press FREQ then Up Arrow or Down Arrow

52

Change Frequency Step

Press SHIFT/FUNC , FREQ then Up Arrow or

Down Arrow to select step SHIFT/FUNC

[Note: Frequency step is shown on Liquid Crystal Display -LCD]

CHANNEL FUNCTIONS

Display Channel

Press CHAN

Change Channel

USB/LSB Toggle

Press CHAN

until 4 dashes appear, enter channel number,

CHAN

EXAMPLE:

To call KMI on channel 401 press CHAN ,

401, CHAN

MODE FUNCTIONS

Press 1 Observe front panel display changes

Voice - Telex Filter Switch

Press 2 Observe front panel display changes

Squelch On / Off

©1995, SGC, Inc.

Press 3 Observe front panel display changes and

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

Speaker On - Off

Timer On - Off

Time - Date Display

Intercom On - Off

SG-2000 MANUAL

receiver is silenced if no signal is present.

Press 4 Observe front panel display changes and speaker is silenced when SPK light is extinguished on LCD.

Press 5 Observe "TIMER" indication over clock portion on LCD.

Press 6 Displays clock time or date on front panel.

Press 7

enter # of remote head desired

or

7 ,

0

for all heads

53

20 dB Attenuator On - Off

Press 8 Observe front panel display changes

Power High - Low

Back light Set

Press 9 Observe HI PWR or LO PWR flag on LCD.

SHIFT FUNCTIONS

Press SHIFT/FUNC , CHAN then Up Arrow or Down Arrow

Display control head ID

Press SHIFT/FUNC , 0

View Timer Frequency On

Press SHIFT/FUNC , 1

Alarm Time - Frequency O

ff Press SHIFT/FUNC , 2

Squelch Level Set

Press SHIFT/FUNC , 3 then

Down Arrow

Up Arrow or

Noise Blanker On - Off

Beep each key stroke

Press SHIFT/FUNC , 4

Press SHIFT/FUNC , 5

Alternate Time - Date

Press SHIFT/FUNC , 6

SWR Forward - Reverse

©1995, SGC, Inc.

Press SHIFT/FUNC , 9

SCAN FUNCTIONS

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

Scan by FREQUENCY

SG-2000 MANUAL

RADIO MUST BE IN

FREQUENCY

DISPLAY MODE. PRESS

FREQ BEFORE ACCESSING THIS FUNCTION. THEN:

Press SCAN then Up Arrow or Down Arrow

54

Change Scan Direction

While Scanning, press Up Arrow or Down Arrow

Change Frequency Step

While scanning by frequency, Press SHIFT/FUNC , FREQ then Up Arrow or Down Arrow Steps of .1, .5, 1, 3, 5 KHz may be selected.

Scan by CHANNEL

CHANNEL SCAN

Press SCAN ,

CHAN (

if dashes displayed, press

CHAN

again) ,

then

Up Arrow or Down Arrow

Scan Rate

While Scanning

Scan by Scan Bank(s)

Define Scan Bank

Delete Scan Bank

Press SHIFT/FUNC , SCAN ,

Down Arrow

(8 bars =Fastest, 1 bar = Slowest)

Up Arrow or

Press SCAN (

if freq. displayed, press

CHAN

again

) ,

enter bank #(s),

then SCAN

Press PRGM , SCAN

enter bank # (0-9), enter channel # in bank,

OPTIONAL -

press

Up

or

Down

for next scan bank memory],

PRGM

Press PRGM , SCAN

enter bank #

Up Arrow ,

SHIFT/FUNC 7

DEFINE MEMORY

Define User Channel Simplex

Press PRGM , CHAN

enter channel #

, FREQ e

nter

RCV frequency

, FREQ

set parameters,

PRGM . (RCV means "Receive")

Define User Channel Duplex

Press PRGM , CHAN

enter channel #

, FREQ

enter

RCV frequency

, FREQ

set parameters

, FREQ

enter

©1995, SGC, Inc.

TX frequency,

PRGM

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Delete User Channel

Press PRGM , CHAN

enter channel # to delete

, CHAN

(Begin with Channel Display) SHIFT/FUNC , 7 , PRGM

TIMER FUNCTIONS

Set Time ON

Press PRGM , 5

on time

Down Arrow ,

off time

PRGM

Set Timer On Frequency

55

Press PRGM , 5 , FREQ

receive frequency FREQ mode

PRGM

Set Timer on CHAN

Press PRGM , 5 , CHAN

enter CHAN number PRGM

12.4 Sample Entries

Marine Use:

Here's all you need to do to call the AT&T Marine Operator on

ITU Channel 401:

I t's easy to call the

POWER To turn on the radio

Marine Operator!

CHAN Until 4

dashes

appear.

Ham Radio Use:

Move to any Frequency in 100 Hz steps!

4 0 3 Channel number desired

CHAN To execute channel change.

Here's all you need to do to get on to 14,290.0 in the 20 Meter

Ham Band and tune down the band from this frequency:

POWER To turn on the radio

PRGM , FREQ

Six dashes will appear

1 4 2 9 0 0

Frequency desired

PRGM

To execute frequency change.

Then, to QSY down the band (move frequency down) simply touch:

FREQ , Down Arrow

If you hold the down arrow, you will keep moving down the band. You can change the size of the frequency step easily. See

Frequency Functions

.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

56

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

13.0 Tour of the SG-2000

The heart of the SG-2000 is the front panel. We have made that as uncluttered as possible while still being able to handle many advanced functions. The front panel of the SG-2000 is dominated by a large liquid crystal display (LCD) which dominates the front panel. The large display was selected because in many applications, the operating conditions of the radio need to be quickly determined. The large backlit display is easily read under all conditions. The backlight may be turned on and off or adjusted as conditions indicate. Now, lets explore the display and what the various LCD indicators mean.

13.1 Front Panel LED Display

REFER TO DRAWING - PAGE 43

(Left to Right - Top half of display)

PRGM

Upper left corner of display. This indicates when the radio is in the Program mode. This mode is used to make permanent or temporary changes to the memories of the SG-2000. Think of this button as the "

Enter

" key.

SCAN

Upper left corner of display. This is activated when the radio is Scanning. Note that the SG-2000 has several ways to scan: by Channel, by Frequency, and by Band. These functions are fully explained in the section Advanced Operations, later in this manual.

CHAN

FREQ

RCV

XMT

Upper left corner of display. These are status indicator lights which tell you what the SG-2000 is doing at any particular moment. Most times, you will have two of the four status indicators on. If you are listening to KMI on Channel 403, you would have the CHAN indicator on and the RCV indicator on. This tells you that the number on the display, to the right of the indicator is showing a channel number, in this case, 403. It also says that the radio is in the receive mode, as indicated by the RCV indicator.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

57

SG-2000 MANUAL

LCD Numerals

Upper center of display. This shows the frequency or the channel which is being used by the SG-2000. Just left of the numerals is a flag which indicated "CHN" if channel information is displayed or "FRQ" if frequency is being displayed.

A3J A3H

A3A CW

USB LSB

VOC TLX

SPK SQL

TND ATT

NB

Upper right corner of radio. These indicators show the current mode of transmitting/receiving (A3J, A3H, A3A,

CW), whether upper or lower sideband is selected (USB LSB), status of the voice/telex filter (VOC, TLX), whether speaker and squelch are activated (SPK, SQL), whether the antenna coupler is reporting tuned system (TND), if the 20 dB receive attenuator is active (ATT) and if the optional noise blanker

(NB) is active.

REFER TO DRAWING - PAGE 43

(Left to Right - Bottom Half of Display)

Timer

Small Numerals

Lower left corner of display. Indicates on or off status of radio timer.

Lower left corner of display. Displays either the date or the time from the SG-2000 system clock.

FWD

S

or

SWR

Lower left center of display. In receive, the letter S is displayed and the bar graph to the right of the S will indicate relative signal strength. In transmit, either FWD or SWR will be displayed. Forward power is transmitter power going to the antenna. Alternatively, in transmit, SWR may be displayed. See section 11.5 of this manual for a description of

SWR. (A good automatic antenna coupler, such as the SG-

230 or SG-235 Smartuner™, will virtually eliminate SWR on antenna feed lines and increase transmitter efficiency.)

58

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

INTCM

Bar Graph

TEMP

HI LO

PWR

Red LED's

SG-2000 MANUAL

Lower center of display over bar graph. It indicates the intercom feature to another control head is active. (You can activate this feature on an SG-2000 with no additional heads attached, but no one will hear you!)

Lower center of display. Small numbers show under graph

(10, 20, 50, 100). The bar graph displays relative strength of received signals and relative strength of transmitted signals.

59

Lower right corner of display. This light indicates a temperature condition which is abnormal for the transmitter and means that transmitter power output is being reduced to correct the condition.

Lower left corner of display. This indicates whether the transmitter is in the high or low power mode. High power output is 150 watts PEP on SSB and 150 watts CW while low power is 50 watts PEP and CW output.

These two red lights are located in the lower left corner of the SG-2000 control panel just above the power switch.

The right hand light of this pair indicates that 12 VDC power is being applied to the radio and that the crystal oven, used for the onboard frequency standard, is available and is being supplied.

The left hand light above the power switch indicates that the radio's electronics are on and ready for operation. Please always allow for 10 minutes of warm-up for the crystal oven to insure the frequency standard has stabilized. This is especially important when the SG-2000 is being operated in extremely cold environments. The radio will, of course, work when first turned on with no warm up, but may be slightly off frequency in violation of regulations which govern operations.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

13.2 Front Panel Controls

Control of the SG-2000 is accomplished through push buttons located on the front panel of the radio. We will cover the functions of each button; then we will do some actual

“on-the-air” operations in the

Operating Session

section.

The primary functions of each button are imprinted on the button itself. The yellow 1 button is the number 1 when you are entering a frequency. When you are listening to the radio, it will toggle between LSB and USB (see Section 13.3 below). Shift functions are printed on the front panel above and below the button. These advanced functions are accessed by use of the Shift/Function key.

The key pad of the SG-2000 may be operated with or without a confirming beep when each key is pressed.

13.3 Primary Keyboard Functions

In this section, we will discuss the various primary keyboard functions beginning with the top row of buttons and working left to right.

SHIFT/ FUNC

PRGM

CHAN

Pressing this key accesses the alternate key functions which are screened on the front panel of the SG-2000.

Pressing this key activates the programming mode, which tells the SG-2000 what to do. The best way to think of the Program function is to remember that commands must be “sandwiched between Program commands.” For example, to program a simplex frequency directly into use, the keyboard sequence is

PRGM, FREQ, enter the digits of the desired frequency and press PRGM to finish the programming operation. You will note that FREQ and the actual digits of the frequency desired were sandwiched between the PRGM key strokes.

It is best to think of the Program button as meaning both

Program

” and “

Enter

.”

If the frequency desired is currently displayed, the CHAN button will change the display to the corresponding channel number if the frequency has been assigned to one of the channel memories. If the desired frequency is displayed, but does not have a corresponding channel, the CHAN button enables the user to input a preprogrammed channel of their choosing .

60

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

MODE

LSB - USB

©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

The SG-2000 comes preprogrammed with all standard marine

ITU and most SITOR channels (see ITU programmed frequency chart). The SG-2000 has the capability to hold up to 100 operator chosen channels in permanent memory.

Display of the current mode is in the upper right corner of the LCD display. The mode operation button allows the user to sequence through 4 modes of operations. The modes of operations are:

1) A3H: AM/AM compatible. On receive, this is the AM mode and utilizes the SG-2000's true AM detector. In transmit, the SG-2000 transmits compatible AM (sometimes called AME, meaning AM equivalent) which is single sideband with 40-50 W of the carrier re-inserted.

2) A3J: Single Sideband. This is the most commonly used method of voice transmission and is very efficient because all the transmitter power is devoted to carrying voice information. No power is wasted by transmitting a carrier.

3) A3A: Single Sideband with pilot carrier. This mode has a 4% pilot carrier reinsertion. This is commonly used among public shore stations and ITU stations where the carrier can be locked on and used by automated services.

4) CW mode: This mode is used for key coded transmissions. While in this mode the user can only transmit a 1 KHz tone by either keying the microphone or Morse code key.

These modes are sequenced counter clock-wise on the LCD display and are stored with the current configuration when the unit is turned off. Mode information may be stored as desired in the channel memory which also stores transmit and receive frequencies.

The use of this button directs the transceiver to operate either upper sideband (USB) or lower sideband (LSB). U.S. and International Marine and Commercial regulations require that only upper sideband be used in marine frequency operation. Lower sideband may be used for

Government or special applications only. In the amateur bands, frequencies on 40 meters (the 7 MHz band) and lower have traditionally employed lower sideband.

61

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

VOC - TLX

SQL

SPK

SG-2000 MANUAL

The standard SG-2000 has two selectable audio filters which allow the user to optimize the reception of incoming voice or data signals. The Voice filter, (VOC) allows a wide band width of 400 Hz to 2400 Hz. The second, the Telex (TLX) filter, is a tight filter centered at 1700 Hz. This filter increases the "signal to noise ratio" of the frequencies used in SITOR,

RTTY, and FEC communications by removing unwanted noise.

Technical note for advanced users:

SG-2000's which have been ordered for

ALE (Automatic Link Establishment), or adaptive HF controller service employing Digital Signal Processing (DSP) systems are specially modified to use the VOC-TLX switch to turn the automatic (receiver) gain circuits

(AGC) on and off. This configuration is selected by moving a jumper on the exciter board of the radio. ALE and other advanced government protocols require that automatic gain control circuits be defeated. This modification allows the AGC speed switch to be called via the serial port.

The modification removes the TLX filter function which is not used under wide spectrum digital protocols. The PRC-2250 MIL is supplied standard with the ALE modification selected by the internal jumper.

The squelch is used to block non-voice reception (e.g. atmospheric background noise) and is incorporated in most

SSB transceivers. The SG-2000 converts the signal to a digital form. The signal is then analyzed by the micro-processor to determine if it is a voice signal. If the signal is determined to be voice, it is allowed to pass. If not, the radio remains silent.

This feature provides a faster response time to the incoming signal so that no data is lost.

This button will engage the front panel speaker on or off. This feature is utilized when the privacy of using a telephone style handset is desired. The SG-2000 back panel speaker jack (J-505) is also controlled by this switch. Please note that when the SG-

2000 is first turned on, all control heads are nor-malized at one half volume, regardless of the last setting of the SPK switch.

Note: External Speaker jack J-505 is only usable when the SG-

2000 is used in the control head attached to the radio configuration.

20 DB ATTN

This control inserts or removes a special -20 dB receiver gain reduction pad in the front end receiver of the SG-2000. When this pad is in the ON position, the SG-2000 reduces it's sensitivity to overcome unwanted RF noise, interference signals

62

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

PWR HI / LO

INTCM / XCV

CLOCK / DATE

©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

and helps to prevent signal overload when communicating with nearby stations. Signal overload occurs only when your location is extremely close to another transmitting station or the amount of signal arriving at your location is extremely high due to high power transmitters and high gain directional antennas being used.

If your SG-2000 is operated in the area of high power broadcast stations, you will appreciate that the SG-2000 comes with a

Broadcast Band filter. This filter will virtually eliminate all AM broadcast signals allowing the SG-2000 to operate in the same room with very high power AM broadcast transmitters.

Power to the transmitter is controlled by this button. When power is reduced, or on LO, the maximum output power is approximately 35% of the full power available. This feature can be used when your normal power output is overloading

(saturating) the receiver of the station with whom you are communicating. In the LO power mode, the SG-2000 consumes less DC current and will therefore reduce power consumption from the supply battery. This feature is recommended to save the life of the battery and is useful when using the SG-2000 under sail or when solar and other power sources are low.

The SG-2000's intercom system is unique, allowing communication between the user and any or all of up to eight separate control heads. By engaging this button and "0", the user may communicate with all control heads by using the microphone. Engaging this button then pressing the number of another control head (1 - 8) enables the user to privately communicate with a specific control head. The control head ID numbers are programmed at the factory and the control head number, which is permanently etched into the memory of the control head MicroProcessor can be displayed by pressing the

"SHIFT/FUNC" and then the number 0 on the keypad. The

LCD will display the head number in the frequency window.

The lower left hand corner of the display shows the current time or date. Either option may be selected by engaging this button. The default setting preferred by most users is the clock function. Time is displayed in military (24 hour) format. If you are making position sightings, you may wish to check the clock periodically against the U.S. Bureau of Standards time stations, WWV and WWVH. These may be found 24 hours a

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

63

SG-2000 MANUAL

day on 2.5, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz providing time of day, storm warnings and navigation aid updates including the status of

GPS satellites.

64

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

TIMER

FREQ

SCAN

©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

This button engages/disables the alarm time programmed into the unit. (See Function Operation Instructions). When engaged, the unit will automatically shut down at midnight if there is no previous pre-programmed time. The SG-2000 may be programmed to turn on, tune to a pre-assigned frequency and mode of operation to receive daily broadcasts. At the end of these broadcasts, the radio can then be programmed to turn itself off.

This feature is used to schedule receiving weather faxes in unattended operation. It may also turn on the radio for a regularly scheduled net or if you want to use the SG-2000 as a sophisticated clock radio.

This function displays the frequency being received or transmitted. If the Channel is currently displayed, pressing the

Frequency key will switch the display to the receive frequency of the channel. If the frequency is being displayed, pressing this key, then the up or down arrows will change the operating frequency of the radio.

If an arrow button is depressed and held down, the SG-2000 will begin tuning in discrete steps ( as small as 100 Hz or as large as 5 KHz) until the button is released or the end of it's frequency range is reached. The size of the frequency steps is adjustable. See the Shift/Function section for details of changing frequency steps using the SHIFT/FUNC + FREQ command.

The Scan button engages the automatic scanning functions of the SG-2000. The scanning function operates in three different modes; scanning by frequency, scanning by channel, and scanning by scan bank. Scanning may also be controlled by an external device such as a computer or ALE controller. When operated by an ALE controller the SG-2000 will scan at speeds in excess of 5 channels per second. Manual operation is variable from 5 seconds per channel to approximately 5 channels per second.

In the frequency mode, the SG-2000 will scan up or down in discrete steps defined by the Step Function. By pressing either the up or down arrow, the direction of the scan can be changed to direct the scan to the desired frequency range. If the squelch is activated in scan, the unit will continue scanning until activity breaks the squelch. The unit will then pause for 5

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

65

SG-2000 MANUAL

seconds and if there are no more breaks in the squelch, the unit will continue in the original direction.

The scan channel mode is similar to the frequency mode in that when activated, the unit will begin to scan factory programmed ITU-VOICE and ITU-SITOR channels. The direction of the scan can be changed using the up and down arrows. When pressing the arrows in scan, the unit will step once in that direction and then pause for approximately 2 seconds. This will allow the manual stepping through of the scan routine to find activity. The ITU or SITOR channels can be selected by first setting the radio in VOC or TELEX modes respectively.

The programmed scan mode allows you to program channels into one of six banks or files for scanning. There are six banks with up to 10 files in each, allowing up to 60 channels to be programmed. When scanning, the unit will search through the selected banks at a pre-determined rate.

This scan rate may be changed at any time using the

SHIFT/FUNC + RATE

. keys. If the squelch is on during the scan routing, scanning will pause on a squelch break. If there is no further activity on that channel, scanning will resume after 5 seconds. The up/down arrows can be used to change the direction of the scan and to step through the scan banks manually.

13.4 Shift Functions

To access the secondary function keys on the upper half on the front panel, the operator will depress the

SHIFT/FUNC

key prior to pressing the desired key. Secondary functions of keys (The functions printed above the buttons on the panel) are described as follows:

Back Light

Control Head #

View Timer

SQL Level

©1995, SGC, Inc.

This function engages the back lighting of the front panel. To change the back lighting, press “SHIFT FUNCTION,”

“CHANNEL,” then use the up or down arrow to adjust the back lighting to a comfortable level.

This key is used to view the Control Head number preprogrammed by the manufacturer (see INTCM-XCV key in preceding section).

These two keys are used to preview the pre-programmed alarm times and their corresponding channel or frequency.

This function allows you to set a squelch level by using the Up

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

66

Noise Blanker

FWD - SWR

Lockout

Delete

Display

Beep

Step

©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

or Down arrows. To optimize the squelch level, depress the

Up and Down buttons respectively and increase the SQL-Level once or twice. This function allows for optimum detection and minimum background noise. For viewing purposes, the adjustment levels are displayed on the bar coded meter.

This optional feature allows the radio to recover information that would otherwise be drowned out by high powered impulse type noise. In noisy environments, engine spark noise, lightning, radar pulses or other EMI sources can cause the radio's built-in automatic gain control to reduce the sensitivity to the input signal. With the noise blanker, incoming noise is detected and turns off the receiver for the length of the noise pulse, thus preventing the automatic gain control from causing desensing.

This function is used to display the output power and returned (lost) power when transmitting via the bar graph portion of the display. Widely fluctuating readings of either the FWD or SWR when in the CW transmit mode usually indicate problems such as an improperly tuned antenna or a faulty connection between the radio and antenna. Situations such as these can harm the radio and should be resolved immediately.

Function not available in this version of SG-2000. (Applies to custom need. Not to be confused with scanning lockout as described on page 73).

The SHIFT/FUNC plus DELETE sequence is used to delete obsolete or incorrect information when in the PRGM mode.

Engaging this key directs the date and time to flash intermittently on the display in 2 second intervals, thus allowing the operator hands-free access for viewing time and date.

This key is used to engage audible sound (a beep) when any key is depressed. To turn off the beeping sound, press the

SHIFT/FUNC plus BEEP keys again.

The Step function is used in conjunction with the frequency function to allow the operator to select the size of frequency step. The steps are in preprogrammed increments of .1 (100

Hz), .5 (500 Hz), 1, 3 and 5 KHz. If you are operating in ham bands (and especially when using CW), the 100 Hz (.1 KHz)

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

67

SG-2000 MANUAL

mode is best. On the short wave broadcast bands, scanning at

5 KHz is great!

Rate

The Rate function allows you to select pre-programmed scanning speeds of both frequencies and channels which range from .2 seconds to 40 seconds. See Section 13.11, Changing

Frequency or Channel Scan Rates, for specific rates.

13.5 Program Functions

As was mentioned earlier, remember that the PRGM key means two things. At the beginning of a key sequence, it means “OK, do the following.” At the end of a key sequence, it means “OK, enter the preceding and execute the command.”

The Program Functions allow the operator to program the following:

Channel

Clock / Date

Timer

Frequency

Up to 100 channels can be entered by the operator. These channels will remain a part of the pre-programming of the unit until deleted by the operator. All pertinent information such as USB/LSB mode, VOC/TLX, and Attenuator can be programmed by means of this function and mode.

The current time or date can be entered by means of this function.

The Timer function allows the unit to power itself on or off at any time to a specific preprogrammed frequency or channel of your choice .

This function is used to select any frequency between 500 KHz thru 30 MHz (transmit has been disabled below 1.6 MHz.)

Care should be taken not to transmit on restricted frequencies.

Scan

This function is used to program the different banks used by the scanning function. The bank number is programmed first, then the desired channels to be contained in that bank. The up or down arrows are used to step through each bank.

Lock Feature

The SG-2000 can be limited to channelized operation. This function is used to prevent transmission on any frequency chosen to be locked out. This is useful in areas where there are restricted frequencies in which to operate. (See

Transmit

Channel Locking

on page 73 of this manual for the sequence to turn the feature on and off.)

13.6 Operating Session

This section will give you practical key entry sequences which will make operating the

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

68

SG-2000 MANUAL

SG-2000 very efficient.

Power

©1995, SGC, Inc.

Before turning on the power to the SG-2000, you may notice a red stand-by light glowing on the lower left portion of the control head. This indicates the 12 VDC power is available for the radio.

• If you do not see the red stand-by light on, please check your 12 VDC power wiring to determine why power is not being supplied to the radio.

• The temperature of the onboard crystal oven can be maintained ready for power-up if the oven switch (on the rear panel of the SGC-2000) supplies 12 VDC power. The red standby light will remain on. (As you will recall from the introduction to the radio, the onboard frequency standard uses a highly stable crystal oscillator.)

• If the temperature of the onboard crystal oven has not been maintained, allow 12 VDC power to be applied for 10 minutes or longer. If you do not do this, the frequency will not be standard and off-frequency operation may be noticed.

Failure to allow the oven to come up to temperature may result in operation on an improper frequency.

Power on.

Once the availability of power has been confirmed, push power button to turn on radio.

The control head should start displaying radio status information.

The first frequency displayed will be the last frequency used prior to the radio being turned off.

You may also notice when power is turned on that the radio comes up at partial volume. The SG-2000 always comes on at its last volume setting before it was last turned off.

Display.

Now, notice the frequency/channel portion of the display. The indicator to the left of the numbers will inform you whether CHN (channel number) or FRQ (frequency) is being displayed. If Channel is displayed, go to the

CHANNEL section to continue operating in the channel mode.

If you wish to operate in the frequency mode, go to

FREQUENCY section.

If you are in CHN and wish to see FRQ, press the “FREQ” button. If you are in the FRQ mode and wish the display to show channel information, simply press “CHAN”. If the

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

69

SG-2000 MANUAL

frequency displayed does not have an assigned channel number, four dashes will appear on the display. This indicates that the radio is not operating on a channel (and mode) which is in memory.

13.7 Channel

Change Channel - Voice Mode

In order to change the operating channel, press the CHAN key until four dashes appear. You will need to press it one or two times before the dashes appear.

With the dashes displayed, type in the desired channel number with the key pad. Then press the CHAN key a second time to enter the command.

(Refer to the Quick Reference Card)

If the channel desired is a four digit channel number, the function will be entered automatically following input of the fourth digit.

Change Channel - Telex Mode

If the new operating channel desired involves the use of the Telex mode, you must change the mode to Telex

before

attempting to change to a SITOR channel.

This feature is incorporated into the SG-2000's software programming to prevent accidental entry and accidental voice use of SITOR channels. Voice on these channels could interfere with data reception.

As you can imagine, if this feature was not incorporated, it would be possible to enter channel 812, a SITOR channel, accidentally when you meant to enter channel 812, a semi-duplex ITU voice channel.

Use the following sequence to change to a Telex SITOR channel:

1) Set mode to TLX by pressing the “VOC/TLX” button. TLX will be displayed on the right hand side of the LCD display.

2) Depress “CHAN” button until dashes appear. Press “CHAN” once if CHN flag is on left of numbers, or twice if FRQ flag is on).

3) Enter the desired SITOR channel number.

4) Depress “CHAN” key to enter the channel and make it current.

13.8 Frequency

Frequency Change - General

©1995, SGC, Inc.

There are two ways to change the operating frequency of an SG-2000. For large frequency changes, you may use the direct entry method. For small

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

70

SG-2000 MANUAL

changes of frequency you may use the UP/DOWN arrow. When these arrows are used, the frequency will increment in the desired direction (UP or DOWN) in steps of .1 (100 Hz), .5, 1, 3, and 5 KHz. The size of the step is set by the

Change Frequency Scan Step

procedure described on page 69.

Frequency Change - Direct Entry

To change to a new operating frequency via the direct entry method, the following steps are used:

1) Press “PRGM” to alert the memory that new information is coming.

2) Press “FREQ” to specify that frequency numbers will follow.

71

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

3) Enter the frequency digits including the first number to the right of the decimal point. If you are satisfied with the mode and are not working duplex (that is, a different receive and transmit frequencies), go to Step 4. Otherwise, continue here.

Optional: After you have keyed in the digits for the direct entry frequency you may change two other variables. You can specify mode and specify a transmit frequency if you wish it to be different from the receive frequency.

4) You may press the “FREQ” button again at this time to enter

MODE information and select the desired sideband (USB or LSB).

5) You may press the “FREQ” button once more to bring up 6 dashes which are displayed as [ - - - - - - ]. This is where you enter your desired transmitter frequency.

Note: While most of the ITU High Seas voice channels use relatively small frequency differences of under 1 MHz, the SG-2000 may be operated with any difference desired. For example, if you wanted to transmit on 2 MHz and listen on 26 MHz, this is easily within the capability of the SG-2000.

6) Press “PRGM” to enter the information into memory and execute the function.

72

Frequency Change - Incremental

To change frequency a relatively small distance, you may use the following sequence.

1) Press "FREQ" once if FRQ flag is on, twice if CHN flag is on.

2) Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows.

You will notice that the frequency displayed is changing by the increment specified by the

Change Frequency Scan Step

function.

Clarifier Use

When you are on the desired channel or frequency, you may fine tune the receiver by using the Clarifier. This allows the receiver to tune ± 600 Hz from the current frequency and may be used to make a voice sound more natural. Alternatively, it may be used to adjust the tone of a CW station to a desired frequency.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The sequence to use the Clarifier is:

1) Press “CLAR.”

2) Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

You will notice that if you tune lower while listening to a voice on lower sideband, the voice will become lower in pitch. If you turn lower while listening to a voice on upper sideband, the voice will become higher.

Fine Tuning - CW Operation

If you are using the SG-2000 in the CW mode, you should tune in the desired station by pressing the Frequency button and then change the frequency using the UP and DOWN arrows until the received station is heard at the same pitch as the CW sidetone emitted from the control head speaker when you key the radio.

When this is done, you will be operating on the same frequency as the station you wish to work.

If you then wish to adjust the note or tone of the CW station, this may be done with the clarifier. You will be able to adjust the note between 400 and 1600 Hz.

SPECIAL NOTE: Do NOT use the SG-2000 on CW in the LO PWR mode. If you desire to operate CW and LO PWR, use an external tone source and connect it to the external audio I/O port J-301 located on the rear panel of the SG-2000. Vary the amplitude of the external tone source to control output power of the SG-2000.

13.9 Programming

Program User Channel into Memory

User-defined channels are assigned channel numbers 1-99. You may designate any frequency to be a channel from 1to 99. Channel 0 is displayed as E0

the international distress frequency — and may not be reassigned.

Enter a Simplex Channel into Memory

The following steps are required to assign the

simplex

frequency 14,735.1

KHz to user channel 09:

1) Press the “PRGM” button.

2) Press the “CHAN” button.

3) Enter the desired channel number (09.)

4) Press the “FREQ” button.

5) Enter the desired frequency including one digit right of the decimal point. (147351.)

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

73

SG-2000 MANUAL

6) Press the “FREQ” button to select mode of operation.

7) Press the “PRGM” button for simplex operation and to end the programming sequence.

Enter a Duplex Channel into Memory

If the desired channel is a

duplex

channel (e.g. different receive and transmit frequencies), these additional steps are required:

1) Follow steps 1 through 6 as shown above under Entering

Simplex Frequency into Memory.

2) After step #6, press the “FREQ” button once more. Six dashes will be displayed on the LCD [ - - - - - - ].

3)

4)

Enter the transmit frequency

Press the “PRGM” button to enter the information into memory.

Deleting Errors in Entry

In the event an error is made entering information, press the

“SHIFT/FUNC” button and the “7” button to delete any errors. Repeat this sequence as necessary.

Delete a Channel from Memory

You may not delete a frequency from an SG-2000. You may only delete user-definable channels. You may or may not be on the channel you wish to delete. To delete a channel, use the following key sequence:

“PRGM”, “CHAN”, “the channel number you wish to delete, if channel 1-

9, you must add a preceding 0”, “CHAN”, “SHIFT”, “7” and “PRGM”.

13.10 Scanning Functions

The SG-2000 will scan both frequencies and channels. You can scan from 2 to 30 MHz continuously in 100 Hz steps. Or, you may scan just a few of the hundreds of channels.

74

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Program a Channel Bank

The SG-2000 has six channel banks numbered 00 to 05. Each of these banks will hold up to 10 channels, complete with mode and offset (if duplex). The entry sequence is:

1) Press the “PRGM” button.

2) Press the “SCAN” button.

Note: The display will show the “PRGM” indicator active with the large digit display showing a “-0” on the far left.

3) Enter the desired bank number to be programmed (0-5). The display will show the bank number on the far left of the display and the previous channel programmed in the first file of that bank.

If the file has not been previously programmed, the display will show four dashes to indicate it is empty.

4) If the file is empty, as indicated by four dashes, enter the desired channel number.

5) Press the “Up” arrow to proceed to next file in that bank and repeat step 4, or press the “PRGM” key to end the function.

6) If a file is not empty, the file can be deleted by first engaging

“SHIFT/FUNC” and then “7” or “INTCM/XCV.”

7) Press the “PRGM” button to end the function.

Scan by Frequency - General

1) Press the “SCAN” button.

2) Press the “FREQ” button.

Note: If there are no buttons pressed within 4 seconds, the unit will start scanning automatically from the original channel on display at the start of the function.

3) To change the direction of the scan or to step through the frequencies, press the respective “Up” or “Down” arrow.

4) To allow the pause on detection, press the squelch by pressing “3” or “SQL.”

5) To stop the scan, simply press the “SCAN” button.

75

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Scan by Frequency - Specific Range

This is an advanced function and should be studied closely. Also called Program or Band scanning, it allows the SG-2000 to scan in a particular mode between two frequencies. There are two steps to using band scanning with the SG-2000. First, you will need to load channels into the scan brackets. This tells the radio the range within which to scan. When you are done using the band scanning, you will need to unload the scan brackets to allow the radio to resume normal scanning operation.

Load Frequency Limits

Before following this sequence you will need to have the upper and lower frequencies assigned to memories. This is explained in an earlier section. For the purpose of this discussion, let's suppose that you have put 3900 KHz LSB into

Channel 22 and 4000 KHz into Channel 23.

1)

2)

Press “PRGM.”

Press “SCAN.”

3) Press “CHAN.” Display will flash [ LC: - - - - ] (lower channel).

4) Enter the channel number of the lower frequency. In this example, 22.

5) Press “CHAN.” Display will flash [ UC : - - - - ] (upper channel).

6) Enter the channel number of the upper frequency. In this example, 23.

7) Press “PRGM” to exit programming and execute commands.

Begin Scanning

This is done by simply displaying frequency and scanning. If you start within the frequency range bracketed, the radio will simply go low to high or high to low, depending on whether you have pressed the “Up” or “Down” arrow.

If you begin scanning frequencies which are outside of the range, the radio will only scan to the range. (e.g. If you start scanning down from 28.400 MHz, the radio would scan down until it got to 3.9 MHz and would then scan only from

4.00 MHz to 3.900 MHz after it reached that range.)

76

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

77

Unload Frequency Limits

In order for the SG-2000 to resume normal frequency scanning (scanning up or down anywhere in its range), it is necessary to unload the scan brackets. To do this, the following sequence is used.

1)

2)

Press “PRGM.”

Press “SCAN.”

3) Press “CHAN.”

4) Display will show [ LC : - - 2 2 ] (If Channel 22 is lower limit.)

5) Press “SHIFT/FUNC.”

6) Press “7” (the delete key in the SHIFT/FUNC mode.)

7) Press “CHAN.”

8) Display will show [ L C : - - 2 3 ] (If Channel 23 is upper limit.)

9) Press “SHIFT/FUNC.”

10) Press “7” (the delete key in the SHIFT/FUNC mode.)

11) Press “PRGM” to execute the function and exit the programming mode.

Scan by Channels

1) Press “SCAN.”

2) Press “CHAN.” (If dashes appear, press CHAN again.)

Note: If there are no keys pressed within 4 seconds, the unit will start scanning automatically from the original channel on display at the start of the function.

3) To change the direction of the scan or to step through the channels, press the respective “Up” or “Down” arrow.

4) To allow the pause on detection, press the squelch by pressing “3” or “SQL.”

5) To change from scanning the ITU channels to the SITOR channels or visa versa, set the unit in VOC or TLX mode respectively by engaging the “2” or “VOC/TLX” button.

6) To stop the scan, simply press the “SCAN” button.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Scan by Channel Banks

1) Press the “SCAN” button.

2) If the frequency is displayed, press the “CHAN” button to display six dashes.

3) If six dashes are already displayed, type in the desired banks to scan. Example: By entering “0134” the radio will scan through banks 0, 1, 3, and 4. If an empty bank is selected, the unit will first try to scan through that bank; however the bank will be eliminated once it is determined the bank is vacant.

Note: If there are no keys pressed within four seconds, the unit will begin scanning automatically from the original channel on display at the start of the function.'

4) Press the “SCAN” button again to begin scanning.

5) To change the direction of the scan , or to step through the scan banks, press the “Up” or “Down” arrow.

6) To allow the pause on detection, press the squelch by pressing “3” or “SQL.”

7) To stop the scan, simply press the “SCAN” button.

13.11 Changing Frequency or Channel Scan Rates

Separate scan rates are available for frequency or channel scanning. You must be in the frequency scan mode to set frequency scan rate and in channel scan to set channel scan rate. If the unit is not scanning, the function will change the rate of the last scan mode performed.

Change Frequency Scan Rate (In Frequency Scan Mode)

©1995, SGC, Inc.

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “SCAN” button.

3) Press the “Up” or “Down” arrow to change the rate to the following: a) 1 step per second | b) c)

2 steps per second

5 steps per second

||

|||

4) This function will automatically time out after four seconds.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

78

SG-2000 MANUAL

Change Channel Scan Rate (In Channel Scan Mode)

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “SCAN” button.

3) Press the “Up” or “Down” arrow to change the rate to the following: a) 1 channel per 40 seconds | b) 1 channel per 20 seconds || c) d) e) f) 1 channel per second g)

1 channel per 10 seconds

1 channel per 5 seconds

1 channel per 2 seconds

2 channels per second

|||

||||

| ||||

|| ||||

||| |||| h) 5 channels per second |||| ||||

4) This function will automatically time out after four seconds.

Change Frequency Scan Step

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button

2) Press the “FREQ” button

3) Press the “Up” or “Down” arrow to change the rate to the following: a) b)

100 Hz per step

500 Hz per step b) c)

1000 Hz per step

3000 Hz per step d) 5000 Hz per step

4) The function will automatically time out after four seconds.

13.12 Additional Functions

79

Timer

©1995, SGC, Inc.

To turn timer on and off:

1) Press “5” or “TIMER”

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Display Alarm Time ON and Frequency

1)

2)

Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

Press “1” or “LSB/USB” button.

Display Alarm Time OFF

1)

2)

Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

Press “2” or “VOC/TLX.”

Program Time ON-OFF

1) Press the “PRGM” button.

2)

3)

4)

Press “5” or “TIMER.”

Type in 1-4 digits for time on in 24 hour format

Press down arrow to program off time or “PRGM” to end

Program Time ON Frequency

1) Press the “PRGM” button.

2)

3)

Press the “5” or “TIMER” button.

Press the “FREQ” button.

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

Type in frequency desired

Press the “FREQ” key for more parameters or “PRGM” to end.

Press desired parameters (

LSB, ATTN, VOC,...ETC.)

Press the “FREQ” key for transmit frequency or “PRGM” to end.

Type in transmit frequency desired.

Press the “PRGM” key to end or the “FREQ” key to repeat settings.

Program Timer on Channel

1)

2)

3)

Press “PRGM.”

Press “5” or “TIMER.”

Press “CHAN.”

4)

5)

Type in desired channel number

Press “PRGM.”

Clock / Date

To toggle between time of day (24 hour format), and date:

80

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

1)

SG-2000 MANUAL

Press “CLOCK/DATE.”

81

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Set Clock

Set Date

Attenuator

Press the “20 dB /ATTN” button.

Power HI-LO

To change output power level:

Press the “PWR/HI LO” button.

Volume

3) Type six digits for date desired in the format MM DD YY.

4) Press the “PRGM” button.

To turn 20 dB Attenuator on or off:

To change the volume level:

1) Except in Scan, volume can be changed by pressing the “Up” or

“Down” arrows.

2) Press the “VOL” button.

3) Depress either up or down keys respectively.

4) Control of volume will time out or press “CLAR” to close.

Intercom

1) While clock is displayed, press the “PRGM” button.

2) Press “6” or “CLOCK/DATE.”

3) Type six digits for time desired (

ie..131500 FOR 1:15 PM.

)

4) Press the “PRGM” button to end.

To program in the date:

1) While date is displayed, press the “PRGM” button.

2) Press “6” or “CLOCK/DATE.”

To activate the intercom:

1) Press the "7" or "INTCM/XCV" keys

2) Depress a number key 1 to 8 for any specific control head or 0 for all control heads.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

82

SG-2000 MANUAL

3) Depress the “7” button to disperse.

Control Head Number Display

To display control head number for 2 seconds (will be timed out after 4 seconds):

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “0” or “MODE” button.

Back Light

To turn back light on or off or adjust brightness level:

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “CHAN” button.

3) Press “Up” or “Down” arrows to step through available levels.

Noise Blanker

To turn noise blanker on or off (optional):

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “4” or “SPK” button.

Beep

To enable a beep for every key stroke:

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “5” or “TIMER” button.

Display (Date / Time)

To toggle between constant date/time display or to alternate date/time display:

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “6” or “CLOCK/DATE” button.

Delete

To delete last entry made:

1) While in programming mode, press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “7” or “INTCM/XCV” button.

83

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Lockout

To lock out a channel in scan mode:

1) While scanning, wait for a channel to appear and press the

“SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “8” or “20 dB/ATTN” button.

FWD / SWR

To toggle forward power and SWR display in transmit:

1) Press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button.

2) Press the “9” or “PWR/HI LO” button.

Transmit Channel Locking

The SG-2000 includes a provision in software for locking the radio into channelized operation only. We recommend that this function be invoked whenever you are using an SG-2000 in a maritime mobile situation where only one operator knowledgeable about direct entry of frequencies is aboard. In this way, the persons aboard the vessel, who might need to operate the SG-2000 in an emergency, need only be taught how to call for help on the desired emergency channels. Please note that the channels include major ham frequencies on the 75,

40 and 20 meter bands where distress assistance may be available. When the lock is invoked, reception on all frequencies is possible, but transmitting will only occur on programmed channels (including those which are user defined).

Lock for Channelized Operation Only

Use the following key sequence to lock out direct entry of transmit frequencies:

“SHIFT/FUNC”, “8”, “8”, “CHAN”

Unlock Channelized Only Operation

Use the following sequence to enable transmit capability on all direct entry frequencies plus frequencies which are contained in channel memories:

“SHIFT/FUNC”, “8”, “7”, “CHAN”

84

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

NOTE: If you are operating the SG-2000 aboard a vessel or in a mobile installation where channelized operation only is allowed, you may disable the all-frequency transmit capability of the SG-2000 . You may not wish to disclose the unlocking sequence to some operators. Simply say that the radio is type approved for ITU channels and it includes reception capabilities for all frequencies. You will be able to demonstrate that it will not transmit on unauthorized frequencies.

Transmit Frequency Monitor:

To preview the transmit frequency, when operating in the semi-duplex mode, press the “SHIFT/FUNC” button, then press the “CLAR” button and hold it down. The radio will then monitor the transmit frequency. To return to the normal receive frequency, release the “CLAR” button.

Temporary Settings:

The SG-2000 will store current settings on a temporary basis so they may be easily recovered after changing radio parameters. To temporarily store settings, press the “PRGM” then “SHIFT/FUNC” buttons. To recover these temporary settings, press “SHIFT/FUNC” then “PRGM.”

85

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

14.0 Mobile Installation

Many tips regarding mobile installation have been given in the preceding chapters, but such a large and important field warrants its own chapter.

14.1 Shock and Vibration Mounting

The need for shock mounting is widely misunderstood in radio circles. There are two issues with regard to shock mounting which must be considered: physical displacement and frequency.

Displacement is how far a unit moves when vibration occurs. In a vehicle, this may be a small fraction of an inch. The displacement on a sailboat can be 20 feet

— if the vessel is operating in 20-foot seas.

Frequency is how often a change of direction takes place. On a vehicle, frequencies may run up to many times per second, while on a sailboat the frequency may be one cycle in 2 minutes. A high speed paramilitary RIB (Rigid

Inflatable Boat) might encounter shocks at 1 per second, or greater rates depending on sea state and mission. This requires shock mounting.

To estimate whether a shock mounting is required in a particular installation, multiply the frequency (in cycles per second) times the displacement (in inches).

If the resulting number is greater than three, a shock mounting tray should be considered. With a value over five, a shock mounting is mandatory.

Let's look at the sailboat numbers:

In a 10 foot sea, with a wave period of 1 minute, the calculation is:

120" times 1/60th of a cycle per second = a vibration factor of 2.

So in this case, installation of a shock mount is not necessary.

But let's look at what happens on a military four wheel drive vehicle racing across the back country at 60 miles per hour. Here, the displacement can be 3 inches and the frequency up to 2 times per second. In this case, the calculation would be:

3 inches times 2 = a vibration factor of 6.

A shock mount is obviously needed. But let's consider a family vehicle driven on average city streets and highways. Here, displacement would be 1/2 inch or less. This means a calculation of:

.5 inch times 2 = a vibration factor of 1.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

86

SG-2000 MANUAL

In other words, unless you are planning extraordinary abuse of a vehicle, a shock mount is not necessary. But if you run back country roads with 5 inch deep chuck holes which cause a vibration factor over 3, a shock mount is required.

In addition to shock and vibration considerations, the mobile environment brings with it two additional issues which need to be addressed before satisfactory operations will be attained.

One is the ground system; the other is ignition noise.

14.2 Mobile Grounds

“They don't build 'em like they used to” is certainly true about today's automobiles. Not only do they have more wires, which can pick up stray RF, but there are also generally fewer welds which means the ground system presented by the vehicle may not be of high integrity. As a result, ground loops may occur, and in some situations, reduced radiation efficiency due to a smaller ground system. Here are some guidelines which will eliminate some ground issues.

1.

2.

3.

Keep all wire runs as short and direct as possible. This means keeping the path direct. It is especially important to keep the antenna wire from the

SG-230/SG-235 coupler as short as possible to the external mobile antenna

(the SG-303 is recommended). Because the hot wire off the antenna coupler terminal is where the antenna begins, if you have 12" of antenna wire inside the vehicle, and you are using a 9 foot whip, 10% of your antenna is inside the vehicle where it will not radiate and will be susceptible to noise from vehicle systems.

Use the largest wire size practical for power wiring. SGC recommends that power lines from the battery to the radio be at least #6 gauge stranded wire and that the ground of the battery be cleaned periodically to make as good a connection as possible. Wire runs will cause loss. SGC does not recommend any 12 VDC run of more than 25 feet.

The ground from the radio chassis, from the coupler ground post, and from the battery minus terminal should all be attached in two places, preferably using braised wire of #0. The connection to the vehicle chassis should be cleaned of paint and should be scraped to reveal raw metal. If corrosion is likely to be a problem, you may fasten the ground system very tightly using self tapping sheet metal screws and large copper washers (to give maximum surface contact) then lightly dust the area with Krylon™ matte finish or other clear varnish type finish to provide some corrosion protection.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

87

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

SG-2000 MANUAL

The doors, hood, and truck lid should all be grounded to the vehicle using size #0 (AWG) braid or larger. It is important that all parts of the vehicle be bonded together in this fashion.

Take care to ground the vehicle exhaust pipe in several places. If the exhaust pipe is only partially grounded and vibration is encountered, the vibrating tail pipe can cause irritating noise.

For vehicles which are operating in areas of dry, blowing sand, there is occasionally static build-up on the vehicle relative to ground. You may also encounter this phenomenon in a vehicle operated in cold dry climates in the winter months. You may use either a static spray (such as is sold in department stores for use on clothing) or other commercially made products to reduce static.

Tires rolling on pavement may product static electricity under certain conditions. Although not usually encountered on vehicles using semimetallic brake pads and disk brakes, it has been known to happen on older style large military vehicles where the axle shaft is insulated from the wheel. Commercial brush kits are available to resolve this condition should it be encountered.

Don’t assume that your vehicle bumpers are made of metal. Automobile bumpers are being made out of plastics and plastic-filled metal shells which attach to the vehicle using electrically unreliable fasteners. In many cases a metal bumper looks like it should be grounded, but in fact it is not.

There is a simple reason why this happens: some vehicles have the bumpers put on at the assembly plant after a coat of paint or protective finish has been sprayed on the body. This good engineering plan for rust prevention is not acceptable for HF radio work because the paint layer may not be scraped by tightening the bolt and this may result in a poor connection or no connection at all.

If you are installing the SG-2000 in a remote head configuration, it is not necessary to ground the control head with a separate cable. The control head and the RS-422 data lines which are used for control of the radio need only be grounded at the control head plug on the radio in order to work properly. Installation of the control head with grounding should not cause problems, but if any unusual operations are encountered, the existence of a ground loop involving the control head should be investigated.

88

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

14.3 Vehicular Noise Sources

There are three kinds of vehicle noise which will be encountered. One is the ground/static noise which should be eliminated by following the proper grounding procedures noted above. Second is engine noise and third is accessory noise. Let's address these step by step:

1. Diesel engines do not make ignition noise. If you are fortunate enough to have a diesel which doesn't need high voltage spark plugs, you are one step closer to a perfect mobile set up. However, even in diesel powered vehicles, there is still an important source of engine related noise: the generator or alternator.

To eliminate a good deal of vehicle engine-related noise, it is good engineering practice to install RF by-pass capacitors at the battery and across the alternator terminals. The capacitor doesn't need to be especially large: .01 to .1 micro Farad disk ceramic capacitors with a working voltage of 100 V will do just fine. We recommend the use of non-polarized capacitors: these are simpler to install because polarity may be ignored.

2. Gasoline or natural gas-powered vehicles have high voltage wiring for ignition spark plugs which causes a small amount of radio frequency energy to be transmitted each time the cylinder fires. So, on an eight- cylinder car which is running at 3,000 RPM, there are 6,000 little sparks every minute. Four cylinder cars emit 3,000 sparks at the same RPM.

The key point of installation here is this: Get the antenna system as far away from the engine compartment as possible. This is why SGC developed the QMS (Quick Mount System). Not only does this keep the coupler to antenna wiring as short as possible, but it also puts another layer of metal between the noisy engine and the antenna base.

3. The noisiest wire in the vehicle is the lead from the ignition coil to the center conductor of the distributor and the wiring in the vicinity of the distributor itself. If you doubt this, we suggest you invest $10.00 in the best mobile trouble shooting device made: a small cheap AM radio. All you need to do to “sniff out” 90% of the vehicle noises you will encounter is to put this little AM radio to the high end of the broadcast band (1610

KHz) and turn up the volume.

As you get the radio near the ignition wiring you will notice a marked increase in spark plug noise. Isolating the problem is the first step toward resolving a noisy engine.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The second step in the “cure” involves the use of what we call “Vitamin

C,” electrical capacitance. Applying a capacitor at the right location will

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

89

4.

5.

6.

SG-2000 MANUAL

solve many problems you are likely to encounter.

Capacitors will bypass spikes of electricity, such as those pulses which run the spark plug to ground. Small capacitors are fine; however, if you add too much capacitance to ground, you will flatten the ignition spike and reduce the intensity of the spark. The arrival time of the spark will also be delayed because the capacitor which you use will slow the rise time of the spark pulse.

With too much capacitance, the spark voltage may drop from 20,000 volts to 5,000 volts which isn't enough to cause a spark in the engine. For this reason, the only place you want to put a capacitor is on the primary side of the ignition coil.

Shielding the distributor is the next most likely means to reduce noise.

This may not sound graceful, but occasionally a brute force approach is needed.

Wheel static may be eliminated with brushes, and accessory noise may be isolated by turning on and off items such as heater fans and air conditioners.

90

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

15.0

Marine Installation

Installation of the SG-2000 in the marine environment requires considerable care in order to achieve highly reliable operation because while the SG-2000 is a very reliable radio, the marine environment brings with it unique problems. These fall into three general areas: Installation of the radio, obtaining a proper ground system, and use of a suitable antenna.

15.1 Marine Radio Mounting

The most common configuration of the SG-2000 in the marine environment is use of a standard mounting tray (SGC Part Number 52-46) and the remote head kit

(SGC Part Number 04-12). With the control head detached from the body of the radio, the operating position may be made much more compact.

SGC does not presently provide a flush mounting kit for the SG-2000. Instead, we recommend the use of the remote head kit's gimbal mount. This allows for the control head angle to be changed to prevent glare off the display screen and allows individual operators to adjust the unit for the most comfortable operation.

In the event that you need to disconnect one end of the control head wiring in order to route cable, please disconnect the female plug end. Disassembly of the control head to remove wires from the control head is not recommended for inexperienced installers. If you do need to remove the plug to route cable, carefully note the connections of each wire. When the wiring is reassembled, care must be exercised to prevent wires from touching.

Power wiring to the SG-2000 should be through its own breaker. This breaker should be 30 amps and the routing of the wire should be as direct as possible.

The minimum wire size which should be used is number 6 (AWG). Wires should be both crimped and soldered to connectors prior to being attached to the power barrier strip. Connections at the D.C. panel should be securely made.

15.2 Marine Ground Systems

“Bonding,” as it is called in marine circles, is the process of tying all vessel metal into a single electrical point. The reason for bonding is that for an HF radio antenna to radiate properly, a large counterpoise of more than 100 square feet of metal must be present under the antenna.

This is not difficult provided you are willing to invest a certain amount of time.

The recommended bonding material is copper foil. Available in several widths, the foil should be routed to keep all leads direct.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

91

SG-2000 MANUAL

SGC does not endorse the use of artificial ground plates as a replacement for an adequate bonding system. While such plates, generally made out of a porous zinc alloy, provide some grounding, they are also subject to corrosion and marine growth which reduces their efficiency. There is no substitute for copper foil and lots of it!

On FRP (fiberglass) hulls, a good connection to the sea may be made by routing foil as close to the hull as possible. When you have a large foil surface inside the hull, separated from the sea water by less than 1/2,” a capacitor is formed. This coupling is very effective. Remember, as far as RF is concerned, total area, not

D.C. continuity, is critical.

Metal hulls are great, but remember if you are dealing with an aluminum hull that corrosion is a constant enemy. The best connections are welded to the aluminum and cleaned frequently because aluminum tends to corrode in the presence of dissimilar metals.

The best ground system is run down the chine, below the waterline, on either side, plus a run down the keel, picking up the engine block and all tankage possible in order to build a large surface area ground.

92

Hull (Top view) showing routing of 2 to 3" copper bonding strap

Bonding Foil

Coupler

Fuel and Water tanks

Engine

In addition to the large metal surfaces, you may also connect life lines and a metal toe rail (if available) to the bonding system.

It had been common practice for several years to put copper screening in the cabin roof and mount the HF antenna above the roof. While this worked well at high frequencies, the lack of capacitive coupling to sea water and the relatively small size of the ground surface, when compared with a large in-hull bonding system, make the copper screening approach less desirable.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

93

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

15.3 Marine Antennas

In general, power boats use whip antennas and sailboats use back stay or triadic antennas. The placement of the antenna is not critical except that it should be kept at least 3 feet away from the rigging.

Please refer to the following diagram for sailboat antenna placement information:

Sailboat Installation - Back stay

Top of mast PVC pipe or shroud cover

4 feet

Insulators

94

Deck

Coupler

8"

Chainplate

Keep lower insulator as close to deck as possible - just above tensioner.

SGC recommends that the top insulator be placed 4 feet down from the top of the mast to reduce the risk of lightning striking the radio antenna. In addition, we recommend placing the lower insulator as close to the deck as possible and covering the exposed backstay with a piece of small diameter plastic pipe (or a slip-on shroud cover) to prevent risk of an RF burn if the antenna is touched while transmitting.

15.4 High Seas Direct™ Connections

High Seas Direct is a system which allows over-the-air HF dialing from a single sideband radio transceiver from anywhere in the world into the AT&T long distance telephone system via AT&T Maritime Services stations WOO, WOM, and KMI.

While the AT&T descriptive literature covers some aspects of the service and operation of the dial modem units, you or your marine radio technician will need the following information to connect the AT&T system to an SG-2000:

The AT& T High Seas Direct product consists of two units: a handset which is mounted near the radio; a modem unit which is typically installed in a less accessible area. The following pin out information is provided:

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

©1995, SGC, Inc.

SG-2000 MANUAL

On the High Seas Direct™ Modem Unit there are four connectors:

1. Modem Power Supply Connections

(Supplies power for High Seas Direct Unit)

Pin Item

1

2

3

Live 12/24 volts DC

Earth (Ground)

Ground

2. Modem RS-232 (DB-9) Connector

(Provides connection to serial devices)

Pin

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Item

DCD

RX data

TX data

DTR

Ground

Fax

Relay contact

Relay contact

Ground

3. Modem Connector to Radio

(Provides connection from Modem to SG-2000)

Pin

1

2

3

4

5

6

Item

Common

PTT out

Mic Out

Audio In not used

Ground (PTT and radio)

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

95

2

3

4

6

SG-2000 MANUAL

4. High Seas Direct Handset

Pin Item

1

2

3

4

5

6

Modem to Radio Connections:

High Sea Direct Modem

Radio Port

Common mic

PTT In

Mic In

Audio Out

Scrambler activate

Ground PTT & Audio

SG-2000 SSB

Transceiver

J301 Rear Panel Conn

Pin Item Pin Item

PTT

TX Out

RX In

Ground

<--connect-->

<--connect-->

<--connect-->

<--connect-->

4

1

3

2

PTT

Audio In

Audio Out

Ground

96

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

16.0 Remote Control

There are three primary methods of controlling the SG-2000. One is by extension of the control head wiring. Second is via short haul modems and auto-answer telephone interface equipment. Third is via computer network and auto-answer devices. The first method does not require any additional equipment. The second two require the addition of the SG-2000 RS-232 option (SGC Part Number

52-34)

SGC does not warrant the remote installation of any unit in configurations which exceed the 50 meter limit of the RS-422 standard used by the local area network between control heads and the radio. This is not because extended operations do not work, but rather because the distance between units blurs the responsibility between the operator of the computer system and the provider of the transmitter. As you can appreciate, the SG-2000 operates on a wide range of platforms including networks which directly access the serial port.

If you are planning to operate the SG-2000 under control of the RS-232 software supplied by SGC, please refer to the Accessories and Software portions of this manual for additional information. ALE and serial control as applicable to adaptive controllers is covered in its own section.

16.1 Extension of Control Head Wiring

The SG-2000 specifications call for remote control heads to be located within 50 meters (approximately 162 feet) of the radio's main unit which houses the receiver, transmitter, and two of the three microprocessors plus the RS-232 and

RS-422 serial communication devices.

We have had reports that control heads have been operated at longer distances, approaching in one case to more than one kilometer, but with slightly degraded performance. The performance degradation which was noted included a slight hum being added to the audio in both receive and transmit and, during severe lightning storms in the immediate area, intermittent operation of the frequency and mode controls.

The method used to extend the control head wiring, in this instance, was to find a spare 25 pair shielded telephone line and then simply replace the 10 wire control head wire with appropriate pairs. The most important portion of this kind of installation is to provide a good DC loop for the Push-to-Talk (PTT) circuitry.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

97

SG-2000 MANUAL

16.2 Short Haul Modems/Auto-Answer Devices

The second way to achieve remote control of the SG-2000 is to use a number of telephone lines and a short haul modem. The configuration is basically the same as the extension via telephone wiring, described above, but short haul modems

(1200 baud) are used to improve the reliability of the computer data which is exchanged between the control head and the main radio unit.

The audio and PTT circuits may be extended using either separate wiring and a voice-operated transmit telephone patch, such as the SGC TEL-TWO (SGC Part

Number: 52-75), and a separate DC loop for PTT control, or by installing three pairs for audio: Two for receive, two for transmit, and a PTT pair. (Please see

AUTO-ANSWER DEVICES below.)

16.3 Line of Demarcation

SGC has found it important in all remote control installations involving the SG-

2000 and PRC-2250 series radios to make clear from the outset of design and installation that the responsibility of SGC is to provide the highest quality radios available. However, the responsibility of SGC does not extend to design of computer networks, microwave networks, fiber optic systems, or telephone systems which are used to control the radios unless specifically negotiated and agreed to in advance.

The distinction is this: SGC and its world wide dealers are responsible for provision of equipment only and do not provide system design or warrant operations beyond the specifications of the radio equipment. The lines of demarcation (or "demark" in telephone company terminology) is as follows:

Remote Control:

Remote Audio:

Push to Talk:

RS-232 (DIN-9) plug of SG-2000/PRC-2250

J-301 rear panel of SG-2000/PRC-2250

J-301 rear panel of SG-2000/PRC-2250

SGC is not responsible for providing integration with networks, devices, and systems which are beyond demark.

SGC and its dealers do not provide system integration with complex networks.

Such services may be undertaken from time to time by either SGC or its dealers, but arrangements to do so are always separate agreements from supply of radio equipment.

98

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

16.4 Auto-Answer Devices

Particularly when used by a network, the SG-2000 needs to get audio for transmit and needs to send receiver audio somewhere. In order to accomplish this, the radio is usually equipped with a telephone patch such as the SGC TEL-TWO system. This unit incorporates a voice-operated-transmit (VOX) circuit which provides automatic switching from transmit to receive when the telephone user is listening and provides automatic activation of the transmitter when the telephone user begins to speak.

The SGC TEL-TWO does not, however, provide a means of taking the telephone drop equipment (called the "instrument" by consumers) to an off-hook condition.

This is because there are hundreds of telephone systems in the world today and most of these are the new digital type. The particular signal level and signal type which signals an "off-hook" condition to the digital switch is different from the old fashion analog auto-answer scheme used in earlier telephone systems such as the Western Electric 1A2 keyset variety.

For this reason, you will need to contact your telephone equipment provider to insure that an auto-answering system is available for your telephone switch. If you are using leased or dedicated pairs of phone lines for the circuit, such as at a remote site, you may wish to construct a simple auto-answer circuit yourself, if one cannot be provided by the local telephone company. Another option is to use additional pairs and isolate functions to eliminate the need for the phone patch.

Circuit particulars will vary as widely as do telephone systems used throughout the world.

16.5 Computer Networks - Serial Control

The SG-2000 may be controlled by a computer at the radio site by simply connecting an appropriate serial line between the radio's rear panel "D" connector, labelled RS-232, and the serial port of the IBM PC computer. We prefer that the radio use COM-1, as COM-2 is generally used by telephone modems.

If your plan includes access via modem, SGC supports the Norton pcAnywhere™ remote computer software and the SG-2000. The process to begin operation of the system is simple. pcAnywhere is started and the modem is connected on COM-2. When pcAnywhere is running, the program SG2000.EXE is started and will seek the first available serial port (generally COM-1) and will initiate communication with the radio. This is covered in more detail in the RS-

232 documentation.

If you are operating a computer on a local area network, you may access the serial port directly, if this is supported by your local or wide area network. If this is the case, please refer to the section of the SG-2000 manual which covers

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

99

SG-2000 MANUAL

details of ALE (adaptive HF controllers) and serial port communications.

100

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

17.0 External Software

This section lists information on the RS-232 software, called Softlink, available for the SG-2000.

17.1 RS-232 Serial Control Software

The RS-232 allows the SG-2000 to be fully controlled by a computer terminal

(PC, IBM compatible, or laptop). Via the RS-232's control lines, the computer (in essence) becomes the control head for the SG-2000. The SG-2000 can now be controlled by eight computer terminals, or by eight remote control units, or any combination of the two. Any function dealing directly with audio (volume, speaker on/off, squelch, etc.) will not be controlled by the RS-232 since this does not apply to the operations of the computer. For data communications or monitoring purposes, the RS-232 connection enables this to be a smooth and user friendly process.

The SGC RS-232 software system provides for direct computer control of the popular SG-2000 all band solid state HF transceiver. Because of its advanced design, the SG-2000 may be configured to support any combination of up to eight computers and control heads. This means, in a typical installation, that you may have six control heads and two computers controlling the same SG-2000.

This tremendous versatility makes the SG-2000 with DOS software the radio of choice in numerous commercial, marine, paramilitary, and amateur applications.

Audio functions of the SG-2000 such as volume, speaker on/off, and squelch, are not controlled by the RS-232 software: these functions are not supported by current IBM compatible computers.

In addition, it is important to note that the software allows operation of the SG-

2000 without a control head. This configuration is desirable in installations where audio or analog data streams can be best handled through other systems.

For data communications or monitoring purposes, the RS-232 facility ensures crisp, reliable, user friendly control of the radio. Version 1.0 of the software does not include ARQ or other data communications, because separate software is available for this specific purpose.

101

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

17.2 RS-232 Software Installation

This section outlines system requirements, equipment setup, software installation, and troubleshooting information.

SGC software is shipped on a 3 .5" disk although 5.25" is available upon request.

You may install the software on a hard disk or you may run it directly from the product disk. If you decide to operate from the floppy drive, we recommend that you make a backup copy of the product disk we provide and keep the original in a safe place. See your DOS manual for instructions on how to make copies of software.

1. System Requirements

The system requires an IBM or 100% compatible computer operating with DOS versions 3.0 or greater and one free RS-232 port available as COM1 or COM2. If you have questions about the availability of these ports, contact your computer hardware vendor.

If you need to find out what version of DOS is in use, return to any prompt (the

C:\> prompt for example) and type:

VER

[enter]

The computer will then respond with the version number of DOS which is running.

2. Setup

Plug the female end of the RS-232 cable into the computer COM port (either

COM1 or COM2) and the male end of the cable into the SG-2000 RS-232 port.

Turn on the SG-2000.

Boot up the computer.

Insert the SG-2000 software disk into the appropriate drive. See the following sections for specific installation instructions for both floppy drives and hard drives.

Switch the computer to the drive that contains the SG-2000 software if necessary.

Type:

SGC

[enter] on your computer keyboard. You will be presented with the software Main

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

102

SG-2000 MANUAL

Menu.

3. Running Software from Floppy Drives

To run the software on the product disk, place the disk in Drive "A" (for 3.5" floppy). Now change to the "A" drive by typing:

A: [enter]

The computer will respond with the following prompt:

A:\>

Type the following command at the A:\> prompt to begin the software:

SGC [enter]

4. Hard Disk Installation

To install the software on your hard drive, place the program disk in Drive "A"

(for 3.5" floppy) of your computer.

Change to the "A" drive, if you are in some other drive, by typing:

A: [enter]

The computer will respond with the following prompt: A:\> Now type: install [enter].

You will be prompted through the installation process.

In the event you do not wish to use the installation program which is supplied, please refer to your DOS manual and copy the file:

SGC.EXE to the desired directory on your hard drive. The program is started by typing

SGC [enter] at the appropriate DOS prompt.

5. Terms, Conditions, and License

A. SGC software is provided under the following terms and conditions of sale and license:

1.

2.

3.

4.

This software is for use on only one computer.

One back up copy is permitted.

Title to the medium is transferred to the customer but SGC,

Inc. retains all title to the software.

Customer is expressly prohibited from disassembly of the

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

103

SG-2000 MANUAL

software without written authorization from SGC.

104

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

5.

SG-2000 MANUAL

Customers may sell unmodified copies of the software provided that the customer has purchased one copy for each copy sold.

6. All copyright notices shall be retained on all copies of the software.

B. SGC, Inc shall be absolved from all liability resulting from the use of this software. SGC's sole liability will be for free replacement of damaged software.

C. SGC, Inc. reserves all title to the software which is copyrighted property of SGC, Inc.

6. RS-232 Software Troubleshooting

A. PROBLEM: When I type "SGC" (and enter) the computer responds with "Bad Command or File Name".

SOLUTION: Make sure you have logged onto the drive containing the SG-2000 software.

B. PROBLEM: When I type "SGC" (and enter) the computer flashes a message "Communications not established, please check connections and try again."

SOLUTION: Check cable connections first. If all is well, then the next most probable cause is that one of the cables you have tried using is a null modem cable. If this is the case, either replace the cable with a standard one or exchange pins 2 and 3 on one end of the null modem cable.

7.

SG-2000 RS-232 Software Technical Support

All current changes to this software may be found in the ASCII file titled

READ.ME which is included on the software disk.

We hope you do not encounter problems operating our SG-2000 software, but in the event you do, software technical support is available Monday to Friday from

8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Pacific Time at the following:

Voice: (206) 746-6310

Fax: (206 ) 746-6384

105

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

17.3 RS-232 Software Main Menu Display

When the software is started, the Main Menu is displayed:

Mode A3H Channel 99

RC FREQ 3860.0

TX FREQ 3860.0

VOC USB

Time 14:32:50

FWD Power

MENU 1

[A] CHANGE CHANNEL

[B] CHANGE FREQUENCY

[C] PROGRAM

[D] SCAN

[E] CHANGE MODE

Power Setting HIGH

[F]ATTENUATOR

[G]EMERGENCY ALARM

[H] 2182 EMERGENCY

[I] PREVIEW TX FREQUENCY

[J] MENU 2

106

Radio operating parameters are displayed as follows:

Operating channel ___________________

Upper left corner

Receive Frequency ___________________

Upper left corner

Transmit Frequency__________________

Upper left corner

Active Mode of Operation ____________

Upper center

Current Date ________________________

Upper right corner

Current Time _______________________

Upper right corner

Active audio filter ___________________

Middle right side

Active Sideband _____________________

Middle right side

Meter selection ______________________

Above left menu

Power setting _______________________

Above right menu

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

17.4 RS-232 Software Main Menu Operations

The following operations are accessible from the Main Menu (see page 92).

A. Change channel

Press "A" then enter the desired channel you wish to use.

B. Change frequency

Press "B" then enter the new frequency or use the 'up' or

'down' arrows to step through the frequencies. Transmit and receive frequencies may be selected independently if desired.

C. Program Radio Functions

Press "C" and the software will present a sub menu which will prompt you to enter specific information as follows:

[A] SCAN BANK

[B] TIMER

[C] CHANNEL

[D] SCANNING RATE

Program Sub Menu

[E] FREQUENCY STEP

[F] TIME

[G] DATE

NOTE: This sub menu is covered in Section 17.6, “RS-232

Software Programming Functions.”

D. Scan

Press "D" and the Scan Menu is presented:

[A] FREQUENCY

[B] CHANNEL BANKS

For either frequency or channel bank scanning use the up or down arrow to change direction of the scan. To stop scanning, simply press the space bar.

E. Change Mode

©1995, SGC, Inc.

Press "E" and you will toggle through various modes of operation.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

107

SG-2000 MANUAL

F. Attenuator

Press "F" to activate or deactivate the 20 dB attenuator.

G. Emergency Alarm

Press "G" to enable the two-tone alarm generator on the 2182

KHz emergency channel. WARNING: This option will transmit an emergency alarm on the international distress frequency. For this reason, you will be asked to confirm this selection before the transmission is implemented.

H. 2182 Emergency

Pressing "H" will automatically transfer you to the 2182 KHz emergency channel. This selection will not activate the two tone generator.

I. Preview TX Frequency

Pressing "I" will enable you to monitor the transmit frequency in order not to transmit on a frequency that is already in use.

J. Menu 2

Pressing "J" from the Main Menu will enable you to use the second menu. These options are described on the next page.

[A] USB/LSB

[B] NOISE BLANKER

[C] POWER METER MODE

[D] POWER LEVEL

[E]TIME / DATE

[F]VOC / TLX

[G] TIMER

[Q] QUIT

108

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

17.5 RS-232 “Software Menu 2” Operations

A. USB / LSB

This selection toggles between upper sideband and lower sideband.

B. Noise Blanker

This selection allows you to enable the noise blanker to block any and all unwanted intermittent noise pulses. (If the optional noise blanker has been installed).

C. Power meter mode

This selection toggles between FWD power and SWR.

D. Power level

This selection toggles operation between high and low power.

E. Time / Date

This selects display of either the current time or date.

F. VOC / TLX

This selection chooses either the voice or data audio filter.

G. Timer

This selection enables you to activate or deactivate the timer.

H. Quit

This selection allows you to quit the program.

109

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

17.6 RS-232 Software Programming Functions:

Pressing "C" on the Main Menu presents a sub menu which will prompt you to enter specific information as follows:

[A] SCAN BANK

[B] TIMER

[C] CHANNEL

[D] SCANNING RATE

Program Sub Menu

[E] FREQUENCY STEP

[F] TIME

[G] DATE

A. Scan Banks:

Enter the desired Scan Bank to program.

B. Timer:

The following sub menu is presented to allow you to program the radio to

"wake up" at a preset time and operating in any specified mode.

Program Timer Menu

[A] SET ON & OFF TIME

[B] ON CHANNEL

[C] ON FREQUENCY

1. Press "A" to enter the timer's on and off time.

2. Press "B" to enter the desired timer's on channel.

3. Press "C" to program the on frequency .

Selecting option "C" on the Program Timer Menu presents the following menu to set the radio's "wake up" frequency and mode:

Enter on Frequency

RX FREQUENCY 0.0

TX FREQUENCY 0.0

[A] MODE A3H

[B] AUDIO FILTER VOC

[C] SIDE BAND

[D] ATTENUATOR

USB

110

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Enter the desired parameter by depressing the appropriate letter. Select the receive frequency and press return; select the transmit frequency and press return to end function.

C. Programming a channel.

The SG-2000 supports up to 100 user defined channels.

Select the desired channel you wish to program then all of the parameters in the following manner:

CHANNEL

RX FREQUENCY 0.0

TX FREQUENCY 0.0

[A] MODE

[C]

[D]

SIDE BAND

A3H

[B] AUDIO FILTER VOC

ATTENUATOR

USB

First enter the desired channel you wish to program. Select the desired parameter by depressing the corresponding letter. Enter the receive and transmit frequencies. Press return to end function.

D. Scanning Rate:

Program the scanning rate by using the 'up' or 'down' arrows to increase or decrease the rate of scan.

E. Frequency Step:

Program the frequency step by using the 'up' or 'down' arrows to increase or decrease the step in frequency. A display of .5 means that frequency changes are made at .5

KHz increments. A step of 5 means 5 KHz steps, and so forth.

F. Time:

Program the time in the following format: hr : min : sec.

G. Date:

Program the date in the following format month-day-year, i.e., 01-01-92.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

111

SG-2000 MANUAL

17.7 PC Cable Assembly

The SG-2000 is can controlled by a computer — see the previous sections.

However, computers can come with either a 9-pin or a 25-pin RS-232 connector as the COM port. The pin-outs are different between these two connectors; therefore this section will show how to construct a cable assembly to connect an

SG-2000 to a computer using either variation.

112

The figure above graphically represents the connections needed between a 9-pin male connector to be connected to the 9-pin RS-232 socket on the back of the SG-

2000 radio and a 9-pin female connector to be connected to the 9-pin RS-232 plug of the computer's COM port.

The figure below represents the connections needed between a 9-pin male connector to be connected to the 9-pin RS-232 socket on the back of the SG-2000 radio and a 25-pin female connector to be connected to the 25-pin RS-232 plug of the computer's COM port.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

This cable assembly is not supplied by SGC. This information is furnished solely for customers to successfully build their own cables. However, a standard modem cable with a 9-pin male end and either a 9- or 25-pin female end (available both ways) is normally set up this way and will function efficiently if these three wires are verified to be connected as shown.

Note:

A null modem cable can be made to work by changing the orientation of J3 on the SG-2000 MicroProcessor assembly as follows:

1. Remove the top cover of the SG-2000.

2. Note the orientation of the 3 pin connector (J3) which is at the end of the wires coming from the rear panel RS-232 connector.

3. Unplug the 3 pin connector (J3).

4. Rotate J3 180 degrees and re-connect it.

5. Re-install SG-2000 top cover.

113

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

18.0 ALE and Adaptive

Controllers

AUTOMATIC LINK ESTABLISHMENT - ALE

N O T I C E :

The SG-2000 radio as described in this manual is not a controlled export item.

ALE controllers provided by SGC or other vendors which incorporate link protection systems

are

export controlled technology.

THE EXPORT OF THESE

ALE CONTROLLERS REQUIRES A STATE DEPARTMENT EXPORT

LICENSE. SGC WILL NOT SHIP ALE EQUIPMENT TO DESTINATIONS

OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES AND ITS TERRITORIES WITHOUT

APPROPRIATE DOCUMENTATION IN FILE AT SGC HEADQUARTERS ON

BELLEVUE, WASHINGTON.

This section provides information on serial port operation of the SG-2000 and is directed toward users of ALE and adaptive HF radio controllers. The information in this document, however, applies to all serial port applications based on the SG-2000 platform. This section is not intended as a definitive ALE operations manual; that is contained within the SGC HARDLINK™ ALE documentation .

ALE is a technology which was defined by the MITRE Corporation, a federally funded non-profit research and development corporation in Washington, D.C. as

Federal Standards 1045 through 1049 and in the Military Standard 188-141A.

The ALE technology relies on the marriage of two new technologies: multifrequency modems and digital signal processing.

Where normal radio teletype modems send two tones, which are turned off and on, or shifted in frequency to achieve data communications, the multi-frequency modem within an ALE controller uses eight tones spaced 250 Hz apart and extending from 750 to 2500 Hz in the audio range.

By interleaving data between tones, and by turning tones on and off in particular sequences (called Golay interleaving) the integrity and recoverability of the information is greatly enhanced. Then, by using a digital signal processor to recover the tones, exceptionally robust data communications is achieved in conditions where a normal signal (either voice or CW) would not be recoverable.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

114

SG-2000 MANUAL

The data stream which is first established between ALE stations is called the ALE orderwire. It is designed to pass network traffic and to introduce standards beyond FS-1045 for network administration including text store, forward, and other enhanced data operations.

18.1 SG-2000 Serial Port Operation

The SG-2000 can operate under the new U.S. Government Automatic Link

Establishment protocol defined under standard FED-STD-1045 and under the military standards MIL-STD-188-141A. The SG-2000 will operate at both the 2 channels per second scan rate and the 5 channels per second scan rates defined by the standard.

An ALE station comprises an ALE controller unit, a high performance HF SSB radio, and support peripherals. These peripherals may include a dumb

ASCII/ANSI terminal or an IBM PC or AT capable of emulating a dumb ASCII terminal.

The ALE unit, used in conjunction with an SG-2000, performs link quality analysis (LQA) on the ALE signals between stations. LQA information is used in selection of the best channel for calling and communicating. The ALE controller automatically identifies the best channel to speed connections and to provide optimum performance. Quality information on other channels is logged for future reference.

In addition, when under ALE control, the SG-2000 will not interfere with active

ALE traffic channels and will exchange LQA information only with other stations when requested.

The significant advantages of ALE are obtained through the use of forward error correction, (Golay) data interleaving, and redundancy to enhance performance and to provide for error free message traffic. The ALE controller utilizes a digital signal processing unit to perform various linking, analysis, and signal processing functions.

The controller can retrieve and operate on up to 100 channels. These may be selected from any of the preprogrammed memories within the SG-2000 or may use the user defined channels or any combination of preprogrammed and user defined channels.

When not linked, the ALE configured SG-2000 will continuously scan a preselected series of channels, listening for ALE calls, and will be ready to respond. The scanned channels are selectable in groups or individually within a group to provide total flexibility in channel and network management. The scan rate of the ALE controlled SG-2000 is either 2 channels per second or 5 channels per second.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

115

SG-2000 MANUAL

If an ALE system is linked, and operation of the link is disrupted through random noise or deliberate jamming, the controllers will establish communications on another channel.

This function, called link protection, is controlled export technology and may not be exported to other countries without a permit issued by the U.S. Department of State. In addition, export of ALE controllers to certain countries is banned. Contact SGC directly for the current list of banned countries.

The controller supplied by SGC will provide for three modes of orderwire.

These three modes use a low speed 75 baud data circuit which operates substantially below the lowest usable voice channel quality by application of digital signal processing to literally pull signals out of the noise.

The Automatic Message Display allows for the display of alpha-numeric text messages of up to 80 characters in length. The Data Text Message mode allows stations to communicate messages between any selected stations for direct output to or from associated DTE devices. (This facility also allows for error-free transmission of text files and computer files which include the full ASCII character set.) The Data Block Message mode is a high speed means of transferring orderwire messages with improved performance against long fades, noise bursts, and — to a degree — electronic counter measures.

18.2 Serial Communication Protocol

The SG-2000 communicates with the ALE controller via a serial communications port on the controller and the RS-232 serial port (D-subminiature 9 pin connector) on the rear panel of the SG-2000. The SG-2000 serial line parameters are preset to 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, and one stop bit.

All SG-2000 remote control commands consist of five parts as follows:

1.

2.

3.

The "ATTENTION" signal. This consists of forcing the serial control line into a "break" (or "SPACE" [+V]) condition for a period of approximately

10 mS. This is then followed by a similarly 10 mS. period of a "MARK'" [-

V] condition.

ID/Byte Count. This consists of a single 8 bit character. The upper 4 bits should be set to zero to identify this as a command from a "computer" interface. The lower 4 bits are used to indicate the number of bytes to follow but not including the checksum byte. The range of this value will be from 01 ( byte 1) to 0F ( byte 15).

Command Code. The ALE controller requires the use of only three of the many commands available under the SG-2000 control system: RESET,

STORE, and RECALL.

116

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

The RESET command (80) is issued as power up and whenever the ALE controller is switched between on-line and off-line conditions.

The STORE command (84) is utilized to upload frequency and mode data into a selected memory within the SG-2000 for future recall. This command is issued whenever the system operator changes a channel memory value from within the

"Channels" menu on the ALE terminal.

The RECALL command (81) is the most commonly used command when the SG-

2000 is under ALE control. It is typically issued two to five times per second as the ALE controller directs scanning through a selected group of channels. It is also issued during ALE calling as the controller will automatically attempt to select the best channel for an ALE link, using as its decision authority, the output from the Link Quality Analysis portion of the controller.

4. Command parameters (if any). These bytes contain further data which may be required by a particular command - such as Channel and

Frequency values for the STORE command.

5. Checksum. This consists of a single 8 bit value which is created by adding together the values of command code and all command parameter bytes.

Note that this value is not to be included in the total count of bytes specified within the ID/Byte Count number.

18.3 ALE Controller - Command Examples

Example 1:

To reset or restore radio:

01

ID/Count

1 byte Command

80

Reset

80

Check- sum

Example 2:

To STORE Tx/Rx Data into a selected user definable memory within the

SG-2000:

[0A] [84] [15 00]

ID/Cnt Store Channel

10 Bytes Cmd (15 shown)

[56 34 12]

Rx Frequency

(12.3456 MHz.)

[56 34 12] [44]

Tx FrequencyMode Check

(12.3456 MHz.)(USB) sum

[15]

117

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

18.4 Recall a Selected SG-2000 Memory into Active Use

[02]

ID/Count

2 bytes

[81]

Command

[17] [98]

Recall Channel # Checksum

(17 Shown)

18.5 SG-2000 Connections to ALE Controller

Connections between the ALE controller and the SG-2000 are listed in the manual for the ALE controller. For reference, the primary connections are as follows:

ITEM Controller Pin

Transmit Audio

Ground

Receive Audio

Push to Talk Keyline

RS-232 Ground

RS-232 Data

J4-4

J4-8

J4-9

J4-5

J8-18

J8-11

J8-3

J8-7

J8-2

SG-2000 Pin

J-301-1

J-301-2

J-301-2

J-301-3

J-301-4

J-301-4

"D"9-1

"D"9-1

"D"9-3

In addition to the information on accessing the SG-2000 serial port which is contained in the serial port/ ALE section of this manual, the following is a list of the major function codes which are addressable via the serial port.

LABEL HEX FUNCTION

RESET

RCALL 81H

80H

RVIEW 82H

RSTOR 83H

STORE 84H

LDFRQ 85H

LDCLK 86H

LDDTE 87H

EMFRQ 88H

STCLC 89H

SMODE 8AH

TSBFL 8BH

TVTFL 8CH

TATTN 8DH

©1995, SGC, Inc.

RESET AND RESTORE DISPLAY

RECALL CHANNEL FROM MEMORY

REVIEW USER MEMORY CHANNEL

RESTORE RADIO TO DISPLAY

STORE CHANNEL IN USER MEMORY

LOAD FREQUENCY

LOAD CLOCK

LOAD DATE

LOAD EMERGENCY FREQUENCY

STORE CLEARED CHANNEL

STEP RADIO MODE

TOGGLE SIDEBAND FILTER

TOGGLE VOICE/TELEX FILTER

TOGGLE ATTENUATOR IN/OUT

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

118

TXMTP 8EH

TBLNK 8FH

SCSCR

SFSCR

90H

91H

CLARIF 92H

RQXMT 93H

CHSTP 94H

FQSTP

GTTME 96H

95H

GTDTE 97H

SVIEW 98H

STSCN 99H

TXEMF 9AH

CHSCN 9BH

FQSCN 9CH

SPSCN 9DH

SCNPS 9EH

PWMTR 9FH

SCNPN 0A0H

LDTMR 0A1H

LMRGL 0A2H

GTTMR 0A3H

GTTOF 0A4H

INCOM 0A5H

PRMUP 0A6H

PCHUP 0A7H

OBEEP 0A8H

SCONT 0A9H

SWTFR 0AAH

LKCHN 0ABH

UNCHN 0ACH

STSTG

LSTSR

0ADH

0AEH

SG-2000 MANUAL

TOGGLE TRANSMIT POWER

TOGGLE NOISE BLANKER ON/OFF

STEP CHANNEL SCAN RATE UP

STEP FREQUENCY RATE UP

CLARIFIER

REQUEST TRANSMIT

CHANNEL STEP

FREQUENCY STEP

GET TIME

GET DATE

REVIEW SCAN CHANNEL

STORE SCAN CHANNEL

TRANSMIT FREQUENCY ALARM

START/STOP CHANNEL SCAN

START/STOP FREQUENCY SCAN

STEP CHANNEL SCAN

SCAN PAUSE ON SQUELCH

TOGGLE FORWARD SWR READING

STOP SCAN PAUSE

LOAD TIMER

TOGGLE TIMER ENABLE

GET TIMER

GET TIME OFF

SET UP INTERCOM

LOAD POWER UP FREQUENCY

LOAD CHANNEL UP

CHANGE KEY BEEPER

CONTINUE SCANNING

TOGGLE REC/XMT FRQ

LOCK CHANNEL

UNLOCK CHANNEL

STORE

LAST CHANNEL STORE RESTORE

119

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

19.0 Accessories

Two major accessories for the SG-2000 are the Digital Selective Calling system —

Exsel-100 — and the Telerex error correcting radio communications data terminal unit.

19.1 Exsel-100 Selective Calling System

The SGC EXSEL-100 unit is designed to operate with the SG-2000 transceiver but may also be used with any high quality SSB transceiver. The EXSEL-100 system may be configured as a standard unit, compatible with GMDSS CCIR-493 series operation. In addition, the EXSEL-100 may be further configured to operate under the new advanced protocols used by the Australian Overseas Telephone service, the so-called OTC Advanced signaling system. This capability will be especially appreciated by world cruising sail boats and by SGC customers in the outback of Australia.

CCIR-493 is used internationally under GMDSS, the Global Maritime Distress

Signaling System. All of these systems use Digital Selective Calling (DSC) operation.

In selective calling, multiple radio receivers are used on a single frequency as a network configuration. Just as the telephone company assigns a telephone number to a particular telephone, each receiver in the DSC network is assigned a distinctive number. The distinctive number of each set is not operator-adjustable, but is readily changed in a matter of minutes by a qualified technician.

To call a particular unit, the sending operator dials the desired unit's unique code by setting thumb wheel number switches then pressing a spring loaded SEND button.

The receiver whose code has been sent will respond with a "handshake" tone so that the sender knows the call was received. At the distant receiver, a red light will turn on and stay on until the SEND/RESET button is toggled briefly to

RESET.

The EXSEL-100 Unit is largely immune to false triggering and will operate under most adverse atmospheric conditions. In fact signaling is often better than voice, so you should not be surprised if you occasionally receive a call but cannot hear your party well.

120

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

The EXSEL-100 enclosure allows use in automobiles, or alternatively, in base station installations with transceivers other than the SG-2000. For installation with units other than the SG-2000, please refer to the EXSEL-100 Interconnection

Diagram for required connections to the transceiver.

121

19.2 TELEREX™ ARQ/FEC/SELFEC System

The

TELEREX-ST

is an optional sophisticated microprocessor-controlled error- correcting radio communications data terminal. Despite its considerable capability, it is extremely easy for the unsophisticated operator to use.

It has been designed primarily for text communication in marine and land based point-to-point radio links and complies fully with CCIR recommendation 476-4.

It incorporates (optional) Channel Free signal reception and generation, according to CCIR recommendation 492-3.

If you have purchased the associated IBM-PC driver software (optional) for the

TELEREX-ST

, you will be almost entirely insulated from the COMMAND code sequences which are dealt with at length in this manual. Only the initial sections, covering installation and set up, need be read. From that point, the software is menu driven. Unless you encounter specific problems, you should not need to refer to this manual further.

With care in installation and proper attention to the shielding and grounding of leads, the

TELEREX-ST

should provide many years of reliable service.

The

TELEREX-ST

connects between a radio transceiver and a computer or a dumb ASCII terminal. Data is passed to the

TELEREX-ST

by means of a serial

RS-232 connection. The computer or terminal must be equipped with a suitable interface. The unit converts text entered from the terminal into encoded audio tone signals that are transmitted over the radio link. It also decodes audio signals from the radio into text to be passed to the terminal, automatically handling all transmit/receive changeover switching.

MIXED MODE

(Voice-Telex)

OPERATION NOTE:

When using the SG-2000 with the Telerex (or any other data controller), be sure to remove power from the Telerex unit when the voice mode is being used in order to avoid the possibility of transmitting both voice and data at the same time.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

122

20.0 Answers to Frequently Asked Questions

1)

2)

3)

The following is a short list of our more frequently asked questions:

Is there a charge for repairs out of warranty?

Radios are warranted for five years parts and labor. After this five year period, a minimal repair charge is assessed depending on the individual situation.

How can I hook up weather fax equipment?

There are two methods of hooking up weather fax equipment.

A) Attach to the J301 600? in/out port on the back panel of the SG-2000 chassis. Pin 3 is audio out, pin 2 is ground. Output level range is 500 to 800 mV RMS.

B) Speaker and headphone output:

1) Attach to J505 External speaker option on right side of back panel of the SG-2000 chassis. Pin 1 is audio out, pin 2 is ground. Output level is adjustable by the volume control.

2) If the control head is in a remote location, then J505 has been disconnected. In this case, you must remove the back plate on the control head and tap off from the speaker terminals and run wires through a hole in the back panel (you must drill the hole yourself).

Where does the CW key connect?

There are 2 locations (3 if the splitter box is included) to which you can connect a CW key:

A) J301 on the rear panel; pin 4 is PTT, pin 2 is ground.

B) Front panel microphone connector; pin 4 is PTT, pin 3 is ground.

C) Optional microphone splitter box which allows simultaneous hook-up of microphone, CW key, and headset (same connections as front panel microphone connector).

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

SG-2000 MANUAL

Are there any audio filters available?

The short answer is no, not in the SG-2000 itself. However, our new product,

PowerTalk™ offers several types of digital audio filtering processes. See question 6.

What are the actual values represented by the bar graph?

Bar graph indications are for reference only and do not have a numerical equivalent. In CW mode, you should see almost all bars displayed on the forward scale. In voice, about half the bars displayed is normal. In reverse power position, 0 to 1 bar is normal if external coupler is tuned. In a non-tuned state, between 0 to 5 bars displayed is possible depending on degree of antenna mismatch.

Is a noise blanker option available?

For noise suppression, SGC recently introduced the PowerTalk™ head with

ADSP™ noise suppression.

Can the SG-2000 be mounted in other than an upright position?

The SG-2000 head or chassis or complete unit can be mounted in any position, as long as there is sufficient clearance maintained for adequate air flow around the unit or chassis.

Practical tips for installation of radios/couplers on sailboats and motorboats.

Sailboats - use your backstay only, see section 15.3, page 82.

Motorboats - use the tallest whip antenna practical (28 feet; 23 foot antenna somewhat too short to be efficient). Also, use a long wire antenna if possible —

60 to 120 feet, the longer the better.

Radios with the head remoted - install the radio section of the SG-2000 next to the battery system.

Radios with the head attached - Install the complete unit as close to the battery system as possible.

Grounds on boats - use all metal structures tied together. If not feasible, use 3 to

4 ground radial wire inside the bottom of the boat.

123

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.0 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

The following chapter is intended for more advanced users who would like a better technical understanding of the complexities of the SG-2000 radio.

21.1 Squelch Scale Recalibration

The following procedure recalibrates the squelch level on the SG-2000:

1. Press: Shift/Func , 3 - Squelch Level - , 0 Allow to time out.

2.

3.

Press: Shift/Func , 3 - Squelch Level - , 9 Allow to time out.

This process recalibrates the squelch scale.

Press: Shift/Func , 3 - Squelch Level - , 2

This sets the squelch level to "2".

4. Activate or disarm squelch when operating by pressing: 3 - SQL

21.2 SG-2000 MicroProcessor Reset Procedure

SGC recommends that the following procedure not be undertaken by inexperienced operators. This procedure involves identifying specific pins on integrated circuit chips. If you are not comfortable working at this level of detail on your

SG-2000, please do not proceed. Return the radio to SGC or your SGC dealer for service.

To RESET the MicroProcessor in your SG-2000, follow the instructions below:

1. Turn off radio.

2.

3.

Remove Top Cover.

Remove MicroProcessor shield located at the right rear of exciter board when facing the radio. Refer to drawing (J40100930-B) in schematics and parts layout portion of this manual which follows the technical section.

Identify clock chip IC-7 and pins 18 and 22 as shown in the following diagram:

124

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

Batt

B1 3V

IC-14

SG-2000 MANUAL

Components on Micrprocessor Board

REAR OF RADIO

Pins

18

IC-7

IC-9 IC-11

J-3

IC-

10

22

C-14

Board edge

4. With power removed from the radio, momentarily ground pins 18 and 22 of

IC-7 to chassis for 5 seconds each pin. Repeat.

5. Re-install MicroProcessor shield.

6. Re-install Top Cover.

7. Reapply 12 VDC Power and test.

Please call SGC if further assistance is required.

21.3 Emergency Calling

Alarm Start

There are two buttons which are bordered by a red outline on the front panel. One of these buttons is green and is labeled SHIFT/FUNC.

The other is Red and is labeled EMER 2182. Pressing both of these buttons at the same time will begin transmitting an emergency beacon on whatever frequency is displayed. To send a beacon on the international distress frequency, 2182 KHz, press EMER 2182 alone first, then the two buttons together.

Once the alarm is started, it is only necessary to press the STOP button in order stop sending the alarm. The alarm will turn off after

45 seconds to allow you to hear stations which are calling to offer assistance in your emergency.

As a safety feature, the emergency beacon buttons may be engaged only by depressing both the EMER and Shift buttons simultaneously. This key stroke combination will instruct the Alarm Generator to begin an automatic transmit.

For 45 seconds, two alternating tones will be sent by the SG-2000. These tones are recognized by the international shipping community as an emergency distress call. In some areas, automatic equipment can determine the location of the sending unit. The emergency transmission can be aborted by

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384 ©1995, SGC, Inc.

125

SG-2000 MANUAL depressing the EMER (STOP) button.

126

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.4 Basic Tune-up Procedure (Alignment)

1) Attach a wattmeter and a 50 ohm load to the antenna connector. Allow 10 minutes warm-up before proceeding.

2) Set radio to a channel in the middle of its operating range. Current production radios are aligned using ITU channel 1601.

3) Confirm that radio is in high power mode by observing the front panel

LCD.

4) Attach accurately calibrated frequency counter to pin 14 of IC608 and

Ground. Adjust the trimmer capacitors C639 and C640 to achieve 11.94

MHz +/- 1Hz.

5) Adjust R41 and R42 on the LPA to maximum output power (fully clockwise).

6) Set unit to CW mode. Key unit and adjust R119 on the exciter for 200 watt output power.

7) Readjust R42 to 150 W.

8) Readjust R41 to 50 W.

9) Change the channel to emergency frequency 2182 and set the mode to

A3H.

10) Adjust R338 on the exciter for a carrier level between -3 and -6 dB, (

37.5 to

75 watts)

.

11) Change the operating channel to channel 851 and set the unit to A3A mode.

12) Key unit and adjust R337 on the exciter for a carrier level of -16 dB +/- 2 dB, (

2.3 to 6 watts)

.

Note: Bird wattmeter reads 40.5% on two tone test.

127

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.5 AM Filter Bypass

The SG-2000's normal range is from 1.6 to 30 MHz. To receive down into the AM band, you will need to bypass the AM filter. To do this:

1. Remove top cover by removing six 6-32 black Phillips head screws that secure the cover to the SG-2000.

2.

3.

4.

Place radio with exciter PCB facing up.

There is a long “L” shaped metal heatsink bracket located on the left side of the exciter. On this bracket is the AM Filter PCB.

On the AM Filter board, disconnect the gray coax cable going to the

RF-in jack and disconnect the short coax on the AM Filter into J101 on the exciter PCB. Tape up the short coax connector or remove the

AM Filter board entirely.

5. Connect the long coax directly into J101 on the exciter PCB.

6. Replace the top cover and secure with the six Phillips head screws.

Your SG-2000 will now receive down to 500 KHz.

21.6 Oscillator and Filter Operation

(

refer to block diagram J40100920)

Following is a list of the six major modules and their descriptive functions:

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

Microprocessor assembly

11.94 Master oscillator with oven

VCOs

PLLs

Serial Logic Switches

Tone generator

Refer to Schematic Section at the end of this document.

128

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

(1). Microprocessor Assembly: This module can be broken down to four different parts;

1) MicroProcessor

2)

3)

RAM

ROM

4) Communication port

This module is responsible for programming the VCO and to control the tone frequencies generated.

(1) 11.94 MHz Master oscillator with oven: This module generates the reference frequency for all transmit and receive functions. The Oscillator must be set for ±1 Hz at the highest operating frequency.

(2) VCOs: The VCOs produce the required frequencies to modulate and mix the audio signal in the unit. There are three VCOs in the unit to produce two IF frequencies in the radio.

(3) PLLs: The PLLs work in conjunction with the

MicroProcessor to produce the required voltages used in the

VCOs. There are four PLLs in the radio, three for the VCOs and one for the tone generator.

(4) Serial Logic Switches: These logic switches interface the to analog controls throughout the radio. They control the receive and transmit voltages, the output filters, and high/low power control.

(5) Tone Generator: The tone generator is a serial programmable divider controlled by the MicroProcessor to produce an audio frequency based on the reference clock.

129

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.7 MicroProcessor Assembly

(

Schematic J30100930)

This board is the primary controller for all functions of the SG-2000. The frequency and mode information is sent by the controller head processor to the radio processor. The radio processor then takes this information and converts it to digital signals used by the VCOs and other function switches. The digital control signal is sent out serially through the communication port on the

MicroProcessor board to serially programmable devices on the exciter and the

LPA. The signals control the VCO frequencies, the receive and transmit control voltages, carrier insertion levels, high and low power settings, tone frequency, and audio filter select.

130

21.8 VCO's

(Schematic J30100920)

The VCOs (Voltage Control Oscillators) take an analog input voltage and produce a corresponding frequency depending on the LC resonance of the circuit. In VCO #1, one of the two inductors, L401 or L402 is switched in via

D401 or D402 to oscillate with the series capacitance of VD401 and VD402. The series capacitance depends on the potential applied to the diodes VD401 and

VD402. The oscillator is then amplified and buffered for the output. The same principle applies to VCO #2 where the determinate factors for the frequency are the capacitance of VD403 and L410. VCO #3 uses a 10.7 MHz crystal to produce the required frequency. The crystal is “pulled” up or down depending on the capacitance of VD404.

21.9 PLL's

(Schematic J30100920 )

The PLL (

Phase Lock Loop)

circuits take the reference frequency, 11.94 MHz, and the VCO output frequency and divides each one by a number determined by the microprocessor assembly. The circuit then determines the phase difference between the two results and outputs a high or low voltage, (

0 or 8 volts)

depending on the angle of phase difference. The voltage is then filtered and sent to the corresponding VCO. When the VCOs are locked, or in other words, when the two divided frequencies are the same and there is no phase difference, then pin 7 is set too high, The unit will not transmit unless all the PLLs are locked on the required frequency. One of the four PLLs is used in the tone generation, and does not require an output frequency feedback. (

See Tone Generator.)

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.10 Serial Logic Switches

(Schematic J30100500)

These serially loaded switches are contained in IC3 and IC4 on the LPA. The microprocessor sends a serial 16 bit word out along the data line while CS4 is held low. The 16 bit word is then latched into the two ICs and reflected on the output as either an open or closed collector. These high or low impedances control all the relays, High / Low power setting, high temperature protection circuitry, and the receive and transmit control voltages. The control voltages are used in determining the direction of IF frequencies and filters on the exciter and to enable RF power output.

131

21.11 Tone Generator

(Schematic J30100920)

The tone generator is a PLL used strictly as a programmable divider. The PLL takes the reference frequency 11.94 MHz and divides it down to a frequency that can be used to produce an audio tone. Since there is a divide-by-4 circuit after the PLL, the microprocessor assembly must take this into account.

For example

: for a desired tone of 1000 Hz, the microprocessor programs the PLL with the following result; 11940000/4/1000=2985

This would also mean that any deviation by the reference oscillator will be reflected in the tone by a 4000 to 1 ratio. For a 3 Hz deviation on the reference clock, there would only be a .0075 Hz deviation on the tone output.

21.12 Oven Switch

On the back of the unit is a switch labelled

BAT-SW

. If there is power to the radio, this switch is used to select whether the power to the oven unit is supplied continuously (

BAT

) or only comes on when the SG-2000 itself is turned on (

SW

). Selecting either option depends on the operator’s situation. Selecting

BAT

will keep the oven at the proper temperature even when the radio is off and enable immediate transmission upon turning on the radio; however, it will put a very small drain on your power source. Selecting the

SW

position will eliminate this drain but you will need to let the SG-2000 warm up for 10 minutes after turning it on before you can transmit. SGC recommends that if you are operating a fixed station on AC power, use the

BAT

position; if you are operating a mobile or marine station powered by a battery and go long periods between using the radio, select the

SW

position.

21.13 Alarm Generator

The alarm generator is for emergency use only and is activated by pressing two keys on the front panel. It generates two tones at 1300 and 2200 Hz using the tone generator mentioned above. The individual tone durations are intervals of

250 mS, and alternate for 45 seconds. The 250 mS time intervals are measured internally by the microprocessor clock. The 45 second alarm time is generated by a calender clock used in keeping track of the date and present time.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.14 Master Oscillator with Oven

(Schematic J30100920)

The master oscillator is a self-contained crystal / FET 11.94 MHz oscillator within a tightly controlled oven operating at 65°C. The oscillator produces a 4Vpp sine wave signal at a frequency of 11.94 MHz ±3.4 Hz over a temperature range of -30 degrees C to +50 degrees C. The oscillator is coupled to the PLL chip IC610 and is buffered to pin 14 of that chip. The master oscillator is used as a reference for all the VCOs to establish the required frequencies determined by the microprocessor assembly. The oscillator is limited to a deviation of 3.4 Hz due to the division scheme utilized in the VCOs to correspond to a maximum deviation of

±10 Hz on the output of the unit in transmit and on the highest operating marine frequency band of 25 MHz.

132

21.15 Crystal Oven

(Schematic J30100920)

The 11.94 MHz reference oscillator is maintained at a constant temperature by a solid state regulated oven. The temperature regulating circuit includes a power transistor (

Q601

) and a temperature sensing thermistor. On a cold start, the control transistor is full on and a maximum current of approximately 300 milliampers flows. When the equilibrium temperature is reached, the current drops to a low level just sufficient to maintain the set temperature.

The complete oven assembly is enclosed in a thermal cover which retains the heat, reducing the amount of power required and providing more precise control of the oven temperature.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.16 Output Low Pass Filters

(Schematic J30100500 2/2)

One of six low pass filters located on the LPA assembly is selected by the

MicroProcessor program. These filters eliminate harmonic distortion products from the linear power amplifier output signal.

The following table lists the upper cut-off frequencies of the six bandpass filters selected in the LPA.

2.9MHz

4.6MHz

9.0MHz

15.6MHz

20.7MHz

30.0MHz

133

21.17 Automatic Level Control

(Schematic J30100500) 2/2

Following the low pass filter, the forward power is sampled by a peak detector consisting mainly of the transformer T14 and the diode D18. A DC signal proportional to the forward power appears at the node of R71/C103; the reverse power appears at R69/C99. The forward DC representative is then amplified by

IC2A and given a release time constant defined by C68 and R79. This is then fed to a summing device used to control the level going to the AGC. The AGC in turn controls the audio level going to the modulator (

IC202)

to maintain output power level of 150 watts.

21.18 Modulation Characteristics, Audio Frequency Response

In order to test the modulation characteristics, a single tone, variable frequency signal was applied to the microphone input of the transceiver. The ALC circuitry was disabled. The RF output of the transmitter as a function of the audio frequency was measured and plotted. Results are shown graphically below.

Audio frequency was varied over the range of 100 Hz to 5000 Hz.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

134

21.19 Modulation Characteristics, Peak Envelope Power

Limiting

In order to test the modulation characteristics, a two-tone audio signal was applied to the microphone input of the transceiver. Frequencies of the tones were 400 Hz and 1800 Hz. Amplitude of the composite audio signal was adjusted to ± 10 dB above the level required for full power output (

150 watt

PEP

). The relative level of the two audio tones was set such that the two principal RF frequency components of the RF output were equal in magnitude.

The ALC control; R162 - shown in drawing

(Schematic J30100500 2/2)

was adjusted to limit the power output to 150 watts.

Note that the modulation limiting circuit includes a peak detector thereby performing the identical function for A3A, A3J and A3H modulation.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

P

O

W

E

R

160

150

140

130

O

U

T

120

110

100

P

90

U

80

T

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

-50

SG-2000 MANUAL

INPUT LEVEL 0 Db =300mV

Power output in Watts

-10

0

10

-50

-40

-30

-20

20

INPUT dB A3J

Watts

0.0

0.2

1.6

18.0

131.2

141.1

147.9

147.9

A3H

Watts

37.0

38.7

50.0

103.7

144.5

147.9

147.9

147.9

A3A

Watts

3.9

4.5

8.0

37.0

144.5

147.9

147.9

147.9

-40

150 watts

-30

A3H

A3A

A3J

-20 -10 0

DECIBELS

Input modulation level 0 Db=300mV

10

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

135

20

SG-2000 MANUAL

21.20 SG-2000 Performance Measurements

The following is a diagram of how to set up appropriate test equipment to ascertain the performance of the SG-2000 transceiver.

It is important that the equipment be set up as noted in the diagram on the following page and that the technician or engineer performing the measurements insures that all test equipment is in good working order and has been properly calibrated prior to performing measures.

The SG-2000 is completely aligned and tested at the SGC factory prior to shipment. No further adjustment of the radio should be necessary. It is recommended that the operating frequency of the radio be certified by a qualified technician on an annual basis in conjunction with a good preventative maintenance program as noted earlier in this manual.

EQUIPMENT LIST FOR TRANSMITTER TEST:

Instrument Manufacturer

Tracking Generator Hewlett Packard

Spectrum Analyzer Hewlett Packard

Audio Generator (2) Hewlett Packard

Oscilloscope

Wattmeter

Dummy Load

Attenuator

RF Voltmeter

Tektronix

Bird

Bird

Microlab

Hewlett Packard

Temperature Chamber

VOM

DC Power Supply Sorenson

Digital Voltmeter Hewlett Packard

RF probe Hewlett Packard

Frequency counter Hewlett Packard

Time base standard Hewlett Packard

Model

HP8443A

HP88538B

HP88538B

HP141T

HP204D

5403

43

8327

N/A

HP410C

Assoc. Test Labs

Simpson

SRL60-35

970A

N/A

5381A

H40-107BR

(RF)

(IF)

(Display)

RD1300

260

136

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

TEST EQUIPMENT SET-UP FOR SG-2000

137

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

138

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Internal cable from main radio unit to local control head

RED

SHLD

BLK

ORE

YEL

BLU

GRN

VIO

SHLDS

GRY

WHT

TO HEAD

1

2

3

4

13.6VDC

GND

PTT

OVEN

7

8

9

5

6

ON/OFF

DATA

DATA

SHLDS

AUDIO

10

AUDIO

SGC P.N.

291-310

CUSTOM CABLE

SGC P.N. 881-017

21 inches

AUDIO

AUDIO

SHLDS

DATA

DATA

ON/OFF

OVEN

PTT

GND

13.6VDC

TO RADIO

SGC P.N.

291-310

WHT

7

6

5

4

10

9

8

3

2

1

GRY

SHLDS

VIO

GRN

BLU

YEL

ORE

BLK

SHLD

RED

J20100152 CABLE ASSY TRANCEIVER =21 INCHES

139

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

External cable from main radio unit to remote control head

RED

SHLD

BLK

ORE

YEL

BLU

GRN

VIO

SHLDS

GRY

WHT

TO HEAD

1

2

3

4

13.6VDC

GND

PTT

OVEN

7

8

9

5

6

ON/OFF

DATA

DATA

SHLDS

AUDIO

10

AUDIO

SGC P.N.

291-310

CUSTOM CABLE

SGC P.N. 881-017

RED

SHLD

BLK

ORE

YEL

BLU

GRN

VIO

SHLDS

GRY

WHT

TO RADIO

3

4

1

2

13.6VDC

GND

PTT

OVEN

7

8

9

5

6

ON/OFF

DATA

DATA

SHLDS

AUDIO

10

AUDIO

SGC P.N.

291-310

J20100155 CABLE ASSY REMOTE 1 TO 150 FT

140

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Internal ribbon cable for communication of the Exciter board to

Linear Power Amplifier board

CONN

SGC P.N.

292-066

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

TO EXCITER TO LPA

8 INCHES

BRN

RED

ORE

YEL

GRN

BLU

VIO

GRY

WHT

BLK

BRN

RED

ORE

YEL

GRN

BLU

VIO

GRY

13.6VDC

13.6VDC

13.6VDC

NOISE BLANKER(OPT)

GND

GND

13.6VSW

13.6VSW

DATA

CLK

CS5

RX

TX

TEMP

CS4

ALC

FAN

10VTX

WHT

BLK

ATTN

10VG

FLAT RIBBON CABLE

SGC P.N. 882-013

TRIM FLAT RIBBON CABLE

FLUSH WITH SIDE OF

TOP VIEW

CONECTOR

RIBBON CABLE ASSY J20100157

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

8

10

11 12

13 14

CONN

SGC P.N.

292-066

15 16

17 18

19 20

Total length 8 inches

Speaker assembly and connection

8 ohm

1

SPEAKER

SGC P.N.

490-011

BRN

BLK

2

SPEAKER ASSY J20100560

P5

NO CONECTION

1

2

3

SGC P.N.

294-203

141

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Front panel microphone connector assembly and connection

142

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

22.0 Trouble Shooting

1.

22.1 Dysfunctions

In the event you experience a failure of either output section of the

LPA (Linear Power Amplifier), it is probable that the output combiner transistor (R-21) will also fail and need replacement to restore proper operation.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Over/Under voltage protection is included in the SG-2000. In the event the unit fails to operate, and you believe power is supplied, but the STBY (standby) light is not lit, please measure the power supply for proper voltage and polarity.

If you are operating and the TEMP light comes on after extended voice operation, insure that the antenna system which is used is presenting a reasonable load to the radio. The SG-2000 is normalized at 50 ohms and will operate satisfactorily up to 2:1 SWR levels. Beyond this, power output is reduced and the radio runs hotter, increasing the likelihood that a TEMP light will come on.

If you hear no audio coming out of the speaker of the SG-2000 make sure that SQL is off and that the SPK (speaker) is indicated on the front panel. Remember the external speaker jack on the rear panel of the SG-2000 is active only if the radio has a control head attached to the body of the radio.

If you are wondering if the SG-2000 is working in the receive mode, remember that you can usually hear traffic by tuning across the bands. We suggest you listen to WWV, the international time and frequency standard which broadcasts 24 hours a day on 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz. You should be able to receive this station on one or more frequencies at all times.

If you are using the SG-2000 with the SG-230 Smartuner, remember that the Smartuner will only pass signals near the band the coupler is being used on, unless you have selected Jumper J-2 on the SG-230 to the "Yes" option, which bypasses all active tuning elements in the receive mode or the coupler has been reset by interrupting power momentarily.

If you are not answered by stations in the CW mode, remember the tone of the station you are listening to must be the same as the sidetone of the SG-2000 BEFORE USE OF CLARIFIER. Make tone adjustments using clarifier AFTER you have set your transmit

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

143

SG-2000 MANUAL

frequency on the station you wish to work.

22.2 Scanning in One Direction Only

SGC has received several technical support calls inquiring about the radio scanning only in a single direction. In these cases, the radio is reported to be scanning in only one direction toward a certain frequency. If the radio is set to a low frequency, it may only scan upward toward a higher frequency. At high frequencies, the unit may only scan toward a lower frequency.

This is not a defect with your radio. This indicates that a frequency has been inadvertently entered in the programmed scan frequency provision of the radio. See Programmed Scan in the "Scanning" section of this manual for complete details.

As you may be aware, you may enter two frequencies and have the SG-

2000 scan between them. These are designated "LC" and "UC" on the left hand side of the LCD display. To remove the frequency scan brackets and restore the radio to scanning in both directions, proceed as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Depress “PRGM”, “SCAN”, “CHAN” buttons.

You will see the following: LC: - - - - on the radio display if the lower scan bracket is empty.

You may see the following: LC: - - 2 1 if channel 21 (for example) has been entered as the lower scanning bracket.

To delete LC: - - 21 (Or any other channel displayed) depress

“SHIFT” “7” (DEL)

Depress the “CHAN” button again and the radio will display: UC: -

- - - if the bracket is empty.

If you see UC: - - 42, this means channel 42 (for example) has been entered as the upper scanning bracket.

To delete UC: - - 42 (or any other channel displayed) depress

“SHIFT” “7” (DEL)

8. A hidden frequency may have also been stored* in either the LC or

UC bracket. To remove it, you must locate it, program that frequency into a channel, then delete that channel.

Note: The hidden frequency scan provisions are not a documented feature and are not accessible in civilian versions of the SG-2000.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

144

SG-2000 MANUAL

23.0 SG-2000 Factory Test Procedures

This section details the bench tests the SG-2000 goes through before it is shipped out to the customer. It is included here for our more electronically-minded customers who might want to do their own troubleshooting at the board level. It is highly recommended, however, that any SG-2000 with board-level problems be sent back to SGC Inc or to an authorized dealer for repair.

145

For testing purposes the SG-2000 is broken down to four subassemblies:

Exciter, LPA, Head and Main CPU (treated as one), and the Display subassembly.

23.1 Exciter Testing Procedures

This section contains the required documentation for testing and trouble-shooting the Exciter subassembly.

23.1.1 Required Testing Equipment

S/N Meter

Frequency Counter

RF in line voltmeter

RF Signal Generator

Audio Signal Generator

Power Supply Capable of at 35 Amps at 13.6 Volts

Connection Extension Cables

Exciter-LPA ribbon cable

CPU-Exciter ribbon cable

Spectrum Analyzer

Sweep Generator

Digital Multimeter

SG-2000 Head

SG-2000 Chassis with LPA

SG-2000 Main CPU

Oscilloscope

Bird RF thruline power meter with 250 W slug capable of reading in the 1.6-30 MHz range.

23.1.2 Circuit Description

The Voltage Controlled Oscillator.(VCO sections are composed of a programmable Phase Lock Loop (PLL ) and an oscillator section. (Sheet 6 of 6 of drawing J30100920 is the PLL section.) The processor board communicates with this area to program frequencies for mixing. The communications link between the processor board and the PLL is on sheet 5 of 6. Sheet 5 of 6 shows

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

mainly drivers and a multiplexer (IC510) for addressing each VCO. The oscillators are on sheet 4 of 6 and each has an input tuning voltage range between 0 and 8 volts. As the voltage increases, the capacitance on the varicaps goes down, thus increasing the oscillator frequency. The PLLs control this voltage by doing a comparison between a division of the reference oscillator and the output frequency.

The receiver section of the radio involves three LOs to create two IF frequencies. Starting on sheet 1 of 6, drawing J30100920, the signal comes in via

J101 from the Linear Power Amplifier (LPA), then through a switchable 20 dB pad, then through the 10 dB amplifier made with IC103 and then through a 30

MHz low pass filter to the first mixer. The mixer flips the frequency up to an IF frequency between 82 and 86 MHz. This frequency span is cycled through every 20 KHz of operating frequency due to the mixing scheme of the radio.

The 82 MHz RF amplifier adds about 25 dB to the signal before going through the 82 MHz band pass filter. The 82 MHz filter is a very tight filter used in the

IF stage to increase the selectivity of the receiver and to attenuate the LO signal coming through Mixer A102. It is then mixed down to 10.7 MHz.

Sheet 2 of 6 takes the signal and passes it through the side band filter or an optional filter depending on which mode or option the radio is configured for.

The IF amplifier transfers the signal to the demodulator, IC202, to create the audio signal at TP204. The IF amplifier has a gain control on pin 5 which is a feedback from the AM detector on sheet 3 of 6. This is used to limit the signal level and prevent the demodulator from being over driven.

The audio signal is then filtered by either the voice filter or the telex filter depending on which mode of operation the radio is in. The signal is then routed to an Automatic Gain Control (AGC) circuit. The AGC circuit tries to maintain a certain audio level going into the input / output buffer on sheet 3 of

6. The receiving path is divided into two paths, one which is the 600 Ohm output buffer and the other is the balanced head audio output.

In general, the transmit path follows the receiver path backwards. The audio signal is brought in by either the back connector J301 or through the balanced audio input (J503 and J504) from the heads. The signal is then brought into the

Automatic Level Control (ALC) circuit, IC208, on sheet 2 of 6 drawing

J30100920 where the proper audio level is established and is sent to the modulator (IC202).

The audio is then modulated to 10.7 MHz and sent to the clipper circuit. The clipper circuit is used for compression of the audio signal on the RF level. This is done to produce a higher RMS power level and to produce a more intelligible signal when the signal is received on the other end. This signal is

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

146

SG-2000 MANUAL

then put through the USB filter to get rid of inter-modulation and the other sideband. Both upper and lower sidebands can be sent through this filter by changing the mixing schemes through out the radio with an offset equal to the

USB filter bandwidth.

This signal is then bumped up to the IF frequency between 82 and 86 MHz

(along with a re-injected 10.7 MHz for carrier for A3A and A3H modes only).

The 82 MHz filter is used to attenuate the LO frequency and other miscellaneous signals outside its range. The signal is then amplified and mixed down to the RF frequency. A 30 MHz filter band-limits the signals going out before the transmit buffer increases the transmit level to the level needed to drive the LPA.

23.1.3 Test Setup

Make a visual inspection. Look for quality defects. Check all electrolytic capacitors, diodes, transistors, IC's, solder bridges, etc.

Use the multimeter in the Ohms position. Check for short circuits on the main and regulated power lines: 5VG, 8VG, 10VG, 10VRX, 10VTX, 13.6VSW and

13.6V unswitched.

Connect extender cable from J15 on the Test Chassis to J506 on the exciter board under test.

Connect extender cable from J1 on the Test Microprocessor board to J501 on the exciter board under test.

Plug SG-2000 Head into J503 or J504 connector.

Apply power to the exciter by pressing the "POWER" button on the Head and turn radio on.

Using the multimeter test each test point for the following voltages.

TP501 8VG

TP502

TP503

TP504

10VG

5VG

10VRX

Program the frequency 15.0 MHz into the head to verify if head displays data and there is interaction between radio and head. Refer to operating instructions for programming procedures.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

147

23.1.4

SG-2000 MANUAL

11.94 MHz Reference Oscillator Test

The oscillator will drift for the first 10 minutes after power is applied while the surrounding oven warms up. Check for ~ 1.6 volts on R619 when the power is first turned on. (In the event of failure, refer to the crystal oscillator section of the schematic.)

Check TP604 (or pin 14 of IC610 on older boards) for 11.94 MHz, 6 ±.5 Vpp.

Adjust capacitors C639 (fine) and C640 (coarse) for 11.94 MHz ± 2 Hz on the frequency counter. Note: do not adjust C639 and C640 if the radio has been on for less than 15 minutes.

Verify that the oscillator will work properly with SW501 oven switch in both positions.

23.1.5 VCO Checks

VCO 4, 10.7 Oscillator

Set radio in USB and A3J mode. Check for 4.8 VDC to 5.1 VDC on L416.

Note that the 10.7 oscillator is disabled and there is no voltage on L416 only if the radio is in receiving A3H mode (in all other modes, Q409 will be biased).

Attach frequency counter to TP403 and the voltmeter to TP603. Adjust C447 for 5 volts ± 0.2 volts on the voltmeter. Frequency counter should read 10.7

MHz (USB).

Attach oscilloscope to TP403 Adjust T404 for the maximum level, approximately 1.4 Vpp volts on the oscilloscope.

In the event of failure, refer to the VCO troubleshooting section.

VCO 2, 72 - 76 MHz Oscillator Check

Set radio frequency to 29.9999 MHz.

Attach scope to TP402, it should read 2 ±.5 Vpp.

Attach voltmeter to TP602 and frequency counter to TP402, use a X1 probe on the frequency counter.

Adjust L410 for 5 ±0.2 VDC.

Frequency on TP402 should be 75.60 MHz.

In the event of failure, see the VCO troubleshooting section.

Secure L410 on PCB with a few drops of polystyrene Q-dope.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

148

SG-2000 MANUAL

VCO 1, 84-114 MHz Oscillator Check

Note: VCO1 covers 2 sub-bands: LO = 84.14 - 97.34 MHz,

HI = 97.34 - 112.34 MHz.

Attach scope to TP401.

Attach voltmeter to TP601 and frequency counter to TP401, use an X1 probe on the frequency counter.

High VCO Check

Set radio frequency to 29.9999 MHz. The scope should read 1 ±0.5 Vpp.

Adjust L401 for 7.0 volts ± 0.2 VDC.

Set radio frequency to 16 MHz, the frequency counter should read 98.34 MHz.

Low VCO Check

Set radio frequency to 15 MHz, the counter should read 97.34 MHz and the scope should read 3 ±0.5 Vpp.

Adjust L402 for 7.0 volts ± 0.2 volts on the voltmeter.

Secure L401 and L402 on PCB with a few drops of polystyrene Q-dope.

149

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.1.6

SG-2000 MANUAL

Receive Sensitivity Check

The following describes the alignment of the receiving path on the exciter, starting at RF In (J101) and finishing at pins 9 and 10 of J503/J504 where the audio signal is passed to the SG-2000 head.

82 MHz filter calibration description. See diagram below:

150

This is a combination of two filters: one band-pass filter composed of T106-T108 coupled with a High-pass filter composed of L121-L127. The left side edge of their graphed band pass coincide. The result is a band-pass filter with the limits at 82 MHz and 86 MHz. The 82 MHz filter will be adjusted for a flat response in the band 82-86 MHz by:

1) comparing within 1.5 dB the sensitivity measured at J301 RX Out for three specific RF frequencies. These frequencies correspond with the positions of low, middle, and high on the graphed band-pass characteristic of the 82 MHz filter.

2) connect the Spectrum Analyzer on points A and B at the ends of the 82 MHz filter noted on the schematic, with the radio turned OFF. The filter will be swept and should be adjusted as follows:

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

151

23.1.7 82 MHz and Displayed Frequencies Relationship

Note: This test will show the band position of the 82 MHz filter used by the first intermediate frequency. It is not intended as a routine testing procedure but could help in troubleshooting

Connect the Spectrum Analyzer to the second mixer, pin 8 (VCO 2 input)

Check for the following values:

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

23.1.8

See setup test schematic.

SSB Alignment

Reduce the AGC response to a minimum by turning R286 fully clockwise.

Inject at SG-2000 RF In/Out 10 µV (or less if the audio out on J103 looks distorted) of 10,001.0 KHz.

Turn the radio on and program in the frequency 10,000.0 KHz A3J, USB, VOC,

SPK modes. You should be able to hear the 1 KHz tone difference between the two frequencies and read it on the oscilloscope. If not, refer to the troubleshooting section.

Adjust T404 for 200 mVpp on IC202 pin 10.

Monitor the dB-meter attached at J301 and maximize the signal by adjusting

R238, T202, T201, T105, C160, T106, T107, T108 and L121 to L127. Pass through the tuning of the 82 MHz filter a few times to obtain the maximum signal strength. Reduce the RF In to .5 µV and note the dB level at J301.

Switch SW1 to GND position and note the dB level at J301. It should read -20 to

-25 dB (.08-.05 VRMS). The difference between the .5 µV RF In reading and no

RF In reading should be =15 dB. If not, repeat steps above or refer to the troubleshooting section.

Turn the power supply off

Solder the surrounding shield on the 82 MHz filter with a bead of solder all around. Note: keep the top shield positioned on top of the surrounding shield for better positioning of holes, but do not solder together the two shields yet.

Change RF In to 11,000.9 KHz and the radio to 10,999.9 KHz. You should be able to hear and monitor on the dB meter and scope the 1 KHz tone difference.

Adjust T106, T107 and T108 for maximum indication on the dB-meter. Note the dB level and compare it with the level read at 10,000.0 KHz. It should be within

1.5 dB difference.

Repeat the two steps above for 10,011.0 KHz on the RF Generator and 10,010.0

KHz on the radio.

If the three dB readings from 10,000.0 KHz, 10,010.0 KHz and 10,999.9 KHz are not within 1.5 dB difference, and the S/N ratio is not =15 dB (>10 dB for Rev E boards and earlier), repeat this procedure or refer to the troubleshooting section.

Change modes to A3A, CW, A3J. There should not be any difference in the

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

152

SG-2000 MANUAL

receiving quality.

Note: the next steps are not necessary if all previous steps were successful.

Fine tune the 82 MHz filter using a Spectrum Analyzer (see 82 MHz filter calibration described above).

Turn the power supply to the radio OFF.

Connect RF output of the Tracking Generator to point A on the Exciter with 0 dB output 84.00 MHz.

Connect RF input of the Spectrum Analyzer to point B on the Exciter with the attenuator set to 20 dB, scan width = 2 MHz per division, 10 dB Log scale, scan mode = internal, scan trigger = Auto.

Adjust C160, T106, T107, T108 and L121-L127 to obtain on the Analyzer a graph shape similar to the second graph described in the 82 MHz filter calibration section above.

In the event of failure, check for shorts and bad components

23.1.9 AM Mode Alignment

Note: This step should be done after successfully aligning the radio in SSB mode

Set radio to 10,009.0 KHz, A3J, USB, ATT off, Speaker on, VOC filter in and minimum AGC.

Attach Oscilloscope and dB meter to RX Out on J301 (sheet 3 of 6).

See test setup schematic.

Apply a 0.5 µV, 10,010.0 KHz signal to the RCV In on J101 (see test setup configuration). Check for 1 KHz signal on the oscilloscope and verify that the

S/N ratio is 15 ±5 dB.

Change the radio to 10,010.0 KHz, A3H mode. Make sure jumper on J507 is in the AM position.

Change RF input to AM with about 50% modulation of a 1000 Hz tone.

Increase the output of the generator by 5 dB.

Adjust T301 and T302 in the AM filter and T202 for maximum audio output of the modulating tone. Repeat the above step to reach a S/N ratio = 10 dB.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

153

SG-2000 MANUAL

Decrease the RF In to .5 µV and verify that S/N in A3J did not change.

In the event of failure, refer to the Receive Troubleshooting section.

154

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.1.10

SG-2000 MANUAL

20 dB Attenuator Check

A 20 dB Attenuator is selectable in receive mode by pressing the 20 dB ATTEN key, and is enabled automatically when in transmit mode.

RX: To check the attenuator in receive mode, set the radio to 10,000.0 KHz, A3J,

USB, VOC, SPK, with AGC at minimum and RF generator to 10,001.0 KHz,

.5µV connected at SG-2000 RF In/Out. Note the audio level on the dB meter attached to J301 Audio Out.

Engage the Attenuator on the radio and note the indication of the dB meter.

The attenuator should produce a 20 ±2 dB attenuation of the audio signal at

J301 Audio Out

TX: To check the attenuator in transmit mode, turn the attenuator off and replace the RF generator with the dummy load.

Change mode of transmit on radio to A3J.

Monitor IC101 pin 1 with a voltmeter.

Key the radio in transmit. The voltage on IC101 pin 1 should change from < .5

VDC to 10 VDC, indicating that the Attenuator is engaged automatically while in transmit.

23.1.11 AGC Adjustment

Turn the radio on and program the frequency to 10,000.0 KHz A3J USB VOC SPK.

Apply .5 µV 10,001.0 KHz at the RF In.

Attach the scope and dB meter to J301 Audio Out. You should be able to hear on the speaker and monitor on the dB meter and scope a 1 KHz tone.

155

Adjust R286 to approximately half value and note the value of the dB meter reading.

Increase the RF In signal by 90 dB (32 mV RMS) and note the value of the dB meter reading. The increase of Audio Out should not be more than 5 dB and the scope signal should increase without distortion.

In the event of failure, refer to the Receive troubleshooting section.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.1.12

SG-2000 MANUAL

600 ? Port/Audio Out Check

Set RF Generator to .5µV 10,001.0 KHz

Set the receiver to 10,000.0 KHz, A3J, VOC, USB. A 1 KHz sinusoidal tone should be heard on the speaker and monitored on the scope.

The following values should be read at J103 pin 3 (Audio Out):

Setting

min AGC, mid-range AGC,

R286 fully R286 at mid value clockwise max AGC,

R286 fully counter- clockwise

Audio Out

2.5 ±.5 Vpp 1.8 ±.2 Vpp, no clipping 1.0 ±.2 Vpp, no clipping

23.1.13 Head Port Audio Out

Set RF Generator to .5 µV 10,001.0 KHz.

Set the receiver to 10,000.0 KHz, A3J, VOC, USB.

A tone should be heard and monitored on speaker and oscilloscope.

The following values should be read at J503 and J504, pins 9 and 10, with reference to GND:

Setting

min AGC

(R286 fully clockwise) mid-range AGC at R286

(R286 at mid-value)

Audio Out

1.5 ±.2 Vpp .5 ±.1 Vpp

23.1.14 Voice/Telex Filters Check

Telex: Set the radio to 10,000.0 KHz, A3J, USB, SPK, TLX

Set RF Generator to 10,001.0 KHz.

Monitor the audio tone on the dB meter and frequency counter attached at J301 audio out and move the RF generator through the audio band until a maximum audio signal is found. This should be 1700 ±100 Hz, flat within 3 dB.

Voice: Change mode on the radio to VOC. The audio band-pass should be wider; 350 to 3200 Hz, flat within 3 dB.

156

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.1.15

SG-2000 MANUAL

Transmit Calibration

The following steps will adjust and verify that the RF out from the Exciter will drive the input of an SG-2000 LPA and produce 150 W (ALC disabled) into a dummy load. The audio signal used to produce RF Out from the Exciter can be selected between the 30 mV microphone input, CW tone generator on the

Exciter or 600? audio generator attached at J301 Audio In. All sources should be adjusted for the same level at TP203 and produce the same Exciter RF Out.

Attach a 50 ? dummy load to J102 RF Out. Reduce ALC response to minimum by turning R41 and R42, on the LPA, fully clockwise.

Set R119 to mid setting and R121 to max value (fully counterclockwise).

Set the radio in receiving mode, A3J, USB, VOC, 10 MHz.

23.1.16 Microphone Level Adjustment

Inject 1 KHz, 30 mV RMS into the mic jack on the head.

Key the radio in transmit and verify with a scope the following levels:

• J504 pin 9 and 10 to GND: 1.5 Vpp, no distortion. Adjust R66 (microphone gain) inside the head if this value is different.

• Using the scope to monitor TP203, verify that the signal is 300 mVpp, for

Rev F and earlier boards. For Rev H and later boards, adjust R316 to get

150 mVpp on TP203.

23.1.17 CW Level Adjustment

Note: The SG-2000 produces a J2E (A2J old denomination) type of CW transmission. This is done by substituting microphone signal from the head with a 1000 Hz tone in an A3J configuration. The tone is produced on the

Exciter board and its level is adjusted by R610.

With the radio in receive, CW, USB, VOC and the Exciter RF Out connected to a 50? dummy load, key the radio in transmit and adjust R610 to 150 mVpp (300 mVpp for exciters of Rev F and earlier) at TP203.

Check for: TP301 = 240 ± 10 mVpp (for Rev H and later PCBs)

TP605 = 200 ± 10 mVpp (for Rev H and later PCBs)

157

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

600? Port Check 23.1.18

With the radio in A3J, USB, VOC and a 50? dummy load connected to the

Exciter's RF Out, turn the radio power on.

Apply at J301 Audio In 195 ±10 mV RMS (500 mV RMS for Exciters Rev G and earlier) of 1000 Hz sinusoidal tone.

Key the radio in transmit and verify that the level at TP302 is 150 mVpp. This should correspond to :

TP301 = 240 ±10 Vpp

J301 Audio In = 240 ±10 mVpp.

23.1.19 SSB Transmit Alignment

With the radio in 10 MHz, CW, USB, key the radio and verify a level of 150 mVpp (300 mVpp for Exciter boards of Rev G and earlier) on TP302. If a different level is shown, repeat Microphone and CW level adjustment.

Verify with the scope that the level at TP205 is 4.5 ±.2 Vpp and adjust R238 to obtain a well balanced signal.

Attach scope probe to TP201 and adjust T203 for maximum signal.

Verify the following levels

TP201 =

TP101 =

Rev H boards

300 ±20 mVpp

Rev G and earlier boards

600 ±20 mVpp

70 ±10 mVpp 100 ±10 mVpp

TP102 = 580 ±20 mVpp

TP103 60 ±10 mVpp 100 ±10 mVpp

1.1 ±.1 Vpp

Adjust R121 to obtain a level of 2 Vpp on the collector pin of Q103. This should be able to be adjusted in the range of 30-60% of the R121 value.

158

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Carrier Insertion Adjustment 23.1.20

Note: The SG-2000 produces A3A, A3H modes of transmit by inserting a 10.7

MHz carrier through the Base pin of Q102 at levels of -14 dB and -2.5 to -4.0 dB

Turn the radio on in Receive, 8.0 MHz, A3A, USB and have a 50 ? dummy load connected to RF Out from the Exciter.

Key the radio in transmit and adjust R337 to get a value of 520 ±20 mVpp on the Collector pin of Q103

Change the radio to 2.0 MHz, A3H, USB

Key the radio in transmit and adjust R337 to get a value of 820 ±20 mVpp on the Collector pin of Q103

23.1.21 30 MHz Low-Pass Filter Adjustment

Turn the radio on in receive, 30.0 MHz, CW, USB and connect a 50? dummy load to the Exciter RF Out (J102).

Key the radio in transmit and adjust L108, L109 and L110 to maximum signal on the Collector pin of Q103

23.1.22 ALC Check

Connect J102 on the Excitor (Transmit Out) to J1 on LPA (Transmit In) and the output of LPA to a 50? dummy load.

Turn R41 and R42 on the LPA fully clockwise.

Turn R121 on the Exciter fully counterclockwise.

Set the radio to 8 MHz, CW, USB, Hi (high power).

Key the radio in transmit. Adjust R121 to get 200 W RF Out. Do not keep the radio at 200 W for more than 5 seconds. Adjust R41 to get a reading of 150 W RF

Out.

Change mode of transmit to Lo (low power) and key the radio and adjust R42 on the LPA board to achieve a reading of 50 W RF Out.

If test fails, verify the following levels:

IC208 pin 2 = 2.6 ± .1 VDC HI power without ALC (R41, R42 fully clockwise), 200 W FR Out

IC208 pin 2 = 2.9 ±.1 VDC at LO power

159

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

IC208 pin 2 = 2.7 ±.1 VDC at HI power

160

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Coupler Port Check 23.1.23

J502 provides a coupler (like the SG-230 Pro and SG-235) with 13.6V and takes receive tuning status indication which is then passed to the Head and displayed as TND.

Putting J501 pin 3 to GND momentarily should have the result of the TND indicator being displayed.

23.1.24 Alarm Generator Check

Connect a 50? dummy load to the SG-2000 RF Out and verify that a 2-tone telephony alarm signal is automatically transmitted in A3J, USB, VOC, Hi PWR modes for 45 seconds by pressing:

SHIFT - keep depressed

EMER - press momentarily

The alarm generator can be stopped at any time by pressing the EMER key.

23.1.25 Power Failure Recovery Check

With the radio in receive, turn the power supply off.

Wait two minutes then turn the power supply back on. The radio should turn on by itself and be in the same frequency and mode as before the power shut down.

TROUBLESHOOTING

This is a list of the most common reasons for test failures. DC and RF levels should be those noted in the Voltages Values tables

23.1.26 Receive Troubleshooting

1) dB S/N at J301 Audio Out is less than 10 dB for PCB versions F and earlier or less than 15 dB for versions G and later.

Check that the attenuator is OFF.

2) No receive in A3H mode

Check that FL202 was selected only

Check that the AM detector voltage levels are correct and that Q506 is turned on.

3) AGC Failure

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

161

SG-2000 MANUAL

Set conditions as follows: any frequency in 1.6 to 30 MHz range

A3J

+90 dB (32 mV RMS) at RF In

R286 adjusted at approximately mid value dB meter and scope attached to J301 pin 3

You should then read the following voltages:

TP202 = 4.77 ±.01 V

TP207 = 4.8 ±.1 V

TP302 = 0.16 ±0.005 Vpp

J301 pin 3 = 6.0 Vpp, no clipping

23.1.27 VCO Troubleshooting

1) VCO4, VCO2 and VCO1 failure - frequency is different than the value expected at TP403 (for VCO4), TP401 (for VCO1), TP402 (for VCO2) and the voltage at TP603 and TP601 is zero or 8 VDC.

Check the values of components, check for shorts, check for general line fault conditions along the CLK, DIN and LE lines

2) To check that the PLL works properly, follow the procedure below ( example given for VCO2):

Attach frequency counter to TP402

Attach scope to TP402

Attach voltmeter to TP602

Turn on the radio and program in the frequency 10.0 MHz, USB.

• The frequency meter should read 71.64 MHz.

• The scope should read 3 ±.5 Vpp.

• The voltmeter should read 5.5 ±0.2 VDC.

If the frequency is different, remove from the circuit one side of R427.

162

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

If the frequency is lower than 71.64 MHz, the voltage on TP602 should be 8

VDC.

If the frequency is higher than 71.64 MHz, the voltage should be 0 VDC.

You should be able to change the frequency below or above 71.64 MHz by adjusting L410 and, if the PLL works correctly, it should change the voltage on

TP602 from 8 VDC to 0 VDC. If the PLL works correctly, it may be that the

VCO is oscillating outside the limits of the PLL's capacity to adjust. Check for bad components in the VCO.

Repeat the above procedure for any of the VCOs.

23.1.28 Voltage Values for the Exciter PCB

Measurements in the following table were made under the following conditions:

Receive: 10 MHz, A3J, USB, VOC, 32 mV RMS sinusoidal signal from RF generator. AGC at minimum.

Transmit: RF Output of Exciter connected to 50? dummy load.

- J504 and J503 pins 9 and 10 have 1.5 Vpp sin.

- 10,000.0 KHz, A3J, transmit and receive.

- will produce 2.0 Vpp on the Collector pin of Q103 (for Rev H and later boards only, REV G and earlier will produce 2.8 Vpp).

- ALC at minimum.

The Test Area refers to the marked areas on the Exciter schematics (J30100920, sh1-6) following the tables

The following tables give approximate measurements for DC voltage and AC voltage peak to peak for Exciter boards of revision G and earlier and revision H boards.

163

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

Test Area

108

109

110

111

111

112

112

113

114

115

101

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

201

201

202

202

203

204

205

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

A3H\

Rx, A3H

Rx

Rx

Rx, ANT\

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Tx

Rx

Rx

VOC, RX, AGC\

VOC, Rx, AGC\

VOC, Rx, AGC\

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx, ALC\

Rx/Tx

Note

SG-2000 MANUAL

G

±20%

Tx

Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Att Off

Att on

Rx

Rx

Rx/Tx

Tx

Tx

Tx

3.0 V

4.5 V

0.0 V

5.7 V

6.9 V

1.6 V

3.2 V

3.2 V

2.2 V

3.1 V

4.9 V

5.0 V

7.2 V

7.3 V

3.0 V

4.3 V

4.0 V

4.1 V

5.6 V

1.4 V

2.6 V

5.1 V

2.7 V

7.4 V

0.0 V

6.7 V

7.2 V

1.3 V

1.4 V

0.0 V

0.0 V

9.8 V

4.1 V

4.0 V

1.6 V

4.6 V

4.4 V

6.7 V

6.0 V

2.1 V

DC Voltage

H

±20%

2.7 V

7.4 V

0.0 V

7.3 V

7.3 V

1.4 V

1.4 V

0.0 V

0.0 V

9.8 V

4.1 V

4.0 V

1.6 V

4.6 V

4.4 V

6.7 V

6.0 V

2.1 V

3.0 V

4.5 V

0.0 V

5.7 V

6.9 V

1.6 V

3.2 V

3.2 V

2.2 V

3.1 V

4.9 V

5.0 V

7.2 V

7.3 V

3.0 V

4.3 V

4.0 V

4.1 V

5.6 V

1.4 V

2.6 V

5.1 V

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

164

©1995, SGC, Inc.

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

408

409

410

411

412

413

414

415

401

402

403

404

405

406

407

416

417

418

308

309

310

310

311

312

312

313

313

313

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

SG-2000 MANUAL

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Tx, A3H\

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx, A3H\

Rx, A3H

Rx/Tx

Tx, A3H

Tx, A3A

Tx, A3H

Tx, A3A

Rx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx

2.0 V

2.2 V

6.3 V

1.5 V

2.6 V

0.0 V

0.71 V

3.2 V

3.5 V

1.5 V

5.4 V

2.3 V

1.4 V

0.0 V

2.6 V

2.3 V

1.7 V

7.9 V

4.5 V

7.2 V

6.7 V

0.02 V

1.5 V

2.7 V

2.9 V

5.6 V

5.6 V

6.8 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

3.3 V

3.5 V

4.8 V

5.4 V

5.3 V

1.4 V

-1.3V

5.3 V

0.07 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

DC Voltage

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

2.0 V

2.2 V

6.3 V

1.5 V

2.6 V

0.0 V

0.71 V

3.2 V

3.5 V

1.5 V

5.4 V

2.3 V

1.4 V

0.0 V

2.6 V

2.3 V

1.7 V

7.9 V

5.4 V

5.3 V

1.4 V

-1.3V

5.3 V

0.07 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

4.5 V

7.2 V

6.7 V

0.02 V

1.5 V

2.7 V

2.9 V

5.6 V

5.6 V

6.8 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

5.1 V

3.3 V

3.5 V

4.8 V

165

Test Area

110

110

111

111

112

113

113

114

103

104

104

105

106

107

108

109

114

114

114

115

209

210

211

212

215

217

218

201

201

202

202

205

208

208

SG-2000 MANUAL

Note

G

±20 %

Rx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Tx

Tx

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

Tx

Rx, A3J

Tx, A3H, No Mic

Tx, A3A, No Mic

Tx, A3J

Tx, A3H

A3H

Tx

Rx

Rx, A3J

Tx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

1.0 Vpp

160 mVpp

700 mVpp

650 mVpp

225 mVpp

80 mVpp

300 mVpp

200 mVpp

590 mVpp

870 mVpp

235 mVpp

3.8 Vpp

300 mVpp

515 mVpp

150 mVpp

150 mVpp

120 mVpp

1.2 Vpp

1.1 Vpp

70 mVpp

0.0 mVpp

1.1 Vpp

110 mVpp

165 mVpp

210 mVpp

4.0 Vpp

95 mVpp

900 mVpp

50 mVpp

1.1 Vpp

90 mVpp

60 mVpp

30 mVpp

2.8 Vpp

AC Voltage Peak-to-Peak

H

±20 %

150 mVpp

150 mVpp

70 mVpp

600 mVpp

520 mVpp

50 mVpp

0.0 mVpp

600 mVpp

70 mVpp

165 mVpp

100 mVpp

4.0 Vpp

95 mVpp

900 mVpp

30 mVpp

1.1 Vpp

50 mVpp

30 mVpp

20 mVpp

2.0 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

80 mVpp

700 mVpp

340 mVpp

225 mVpp

80 mVpp

150 mVpp

200 mVpp

590 mVpp

460 mVpp

235 mVpp

3.8 Vpp

150 mVpp

220 mVpp

166

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

602

605

606

607

608

401

403

404

406

407

408

410

413

414

416

418

304

305

309

311

311

313

314

315

301

301

302

302

303

303

304

501

501

502

502

SG-2000 MANUAL

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx, CW

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Rx

A3H

Tx, A3A

Tx, A3H

Rx, .5 µV RF In

Tx, .3µV RF In

Rx, Tx

Rx, Tx

Rx, Tx

Rx, Tx

Tx, Tx

Rx, Tx

Rx, Tx

Rx, Tx

TX, A3H

Tx, A3H

Tx, A3H

Rx

Tx, CW

Rx

Tx, CW

Rx, Tx

Rx, Tx

CW

CW

CW

10 Vpp

6 Vpp

150 mVpp

200 mVpp

200 mVpp

AC Voltage Peak-to-Peak

470 mVpp

2.5 Vpp

850 mVpp

190 mVpp

4.0 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

4.0 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

90 mVpp

2.0 Vpp

80 mVpp

50 mVpp

85 mVpp

3 Vpp

1.5 Vpp

400 mVpp

1.4 Vpp

800 mVpp

3.0 Vpp

500 mVpp

200 mVpp

600 mVpp

2.5 Vpp

12 Vpp

600 mVpp

1.2 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

240 mVpp

2.5 Vpp

850 mVpp

170 mVpp

4.0 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

4.0 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

1.0 Vpp

2.0 Vpp

80 mVpp

30 mVpp

60 mVpp

3 Vpp

600 mVpp

400 mVpp

1.4 Vpp

800 mVpp

3.0 Vpp

500 mVpp

200 mVpp

600 mVpp

2.5 Vpp

12 Vpp

600 mVpp

1.2 Vpp

700 mVpp

700 mVpp

167

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 1

SG-2000 MANUAL

168

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 2

SG-2000 MANUAL

169

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 3

SG-2000 MANUAL

170

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 4

SG-2000 MANUAL

171

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 5

SG-2000 MANUAL

172

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 6

SG-2000 MANUAL

173

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

23.2. LPA Testing Procedures

radio.

This section details the procedures for testing the LPA PCB of the SG-2000

23.2.1

Working LPA sample

Required Testing Equipment

12 inch/lbs calibrated torque wrench

RF Signal Generator with capability of +3 dBm 1.6-30 MHz RF out

Power Supply Capable of at least 30 Amps at 13.6 Volts (PS-35)

Connection Cables

Spectrum Analyzer

Tracking Generator

Multimeter

50 ? 200 W Dummy Load Antenna 30 dB attenuator

Watt Meter and 250 W slug

SGC LPA Test Box, SGC-Twin Current Meter

Variable Power Supply 5-40 V, > or = 2A

23.2.2. Circuit description

The LPA (linear power amplifier) has two pages to the schematic, J30100500.

Transmit RF is received from the exciter on connector J1. The signal is amplified by Q1. Transformer T2 splits the signal for the Class "B" amplifier containing transistors Q2 and Q3. The signal is combined and then split again for the dual Class "B" final amplifier containing transistors Q6, Q7, Q10 and

Q11. The signal is recombined and sent to the filter section. Note: the final amplifiers get power directly from the power supply. The filter section is controlled by IC3 and IC4. There are six low pass elliptical filters which are selected based on the transmit and receive frequencies. Relay K1 switches the filters between the transmit and receive paths.

The forward and reverse RF power is detected by transformers T13 and T14.

The signals are rectified. The rectified signals are used for the ALC (automatic level control), VSWR shutdown and the analog to digital converter, IC5. The digitized signals are sent to the exciter where they are eventually used to drive the VSWR and FWD meter on the display.

The SG-2000 has protection from over and reverse voltages as well as transient spikes. The voltage protection circuit uses a normally open relay which is only closed when the proper voltage is applied. Diode D1 prevents current from flowing during reverse polarity conditions. Transistors Q19, Q20 and Q21 form a logic switch. Diode D11 sets the level of the logic switch. During normal operation, transistor Q20 is on and Q19 and Q21 are off. Current flows through

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

174

SG-2000 MANUAL

Q20 and D1 energizing the relay, K14. If a voltage in excess of the zener breakdown voltage of D11 is applied, transistors Q19 and Q21 turn on and Q20 turns off. Diode D13 provides protection from transient voltage spikes.

23.2.3 Test Setup

Ensure screws holding the final transistors; Q6, Q7, Q10 and Q11 have 12 inch lbs. of torque.

Using the LPA sample board, visually check:

Check all electrolytic capacitors for polarity.

Check for any solder bridges.

Ensure R21 is not touching the PCB.

Install any missing parts, except IC3, IC4, F1, F2 and F3.

Check the orientation of transistors and other parts.

Check the wires on T10 and T8. The colors should alternate green and red.

Check the wires on T6. They should crisscross as shown in the figure below.

Notice, the order of the wires on the teroid does not have to be the same order as the solder connections.

175 green yellow orange red red orange yellow green red yellow orange green

Side View

Top View

Set the resistors,

R20

R28

R2

R32

R41

R42 to approximately mid value to approximately mid value to approximately mid value to approximately mid value to fully clockwise to fully clockwise green orange yellow red

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Note on using HP8443A Tracking Generator as an RF generator

The HP8443A Tracking Generator can substitute for an RF Generator with changes to the following settings:

• If connected to the Spectrum Analyzer, turn CRT intensity on Analyzer to minimum.

• (Scanning) Mode = scan hold.

• Set RF Out to -3 dB before transmitting. Adjust the RF out only when not in transmit.

Open the windings on inductors L1 through L15 to their maximum.

Use the multimeter in the Ohms position. Make the following readings with reference to ground.

Check that all pins on J15 except 5 and 6 are connected to GND and have a resistance = 1 K

Check for the following values:

IC5 pin 1 approximately 10 K

IC5 pin 5 approximately 2.0 M

IC5 pin 7 approximately 2.0 M

Fuse F3 output > 1.0 M

Collector Q6, Q7, Q10, Q11 > 500 K

Base Q6, Q7, Q10, Q11 ˜ 11.2 ?

Pin 4 of IC2

Base Q2 and Q3

> 400 ?

˜ 23 ?

23.2.4 Voltage Protection (Rev E Boards ONLY)

Note: Safety glasses should be worn while testing the voltage protection circuit.

Out of Range Voltage Supply (Rev E and Later Boards ONLY)

Use the variable power supply set on the lowest voltage setting. Connect the positive power lead to J12. Connect the negative power lead to J14.

Watch the current meter on the power supply as you turn on the power supply.

Turn off the power supply if I = 1A and troubleshoot the problem. Increase the supply voltage until relay K14 closes. Record the supply voltage. Continue to increase the voltage until relay K14 opens again. Record the supply voltage.

Relay Closes

Relay Opens between between

9 and 10.5 Volts

19 and 20 Volts

Increase the voltage to 40 V, keep it there for 3-5 seconds and decrease to 0.

Observe K14 turning on and off when it reaches the above voltages.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

176

SG-2000 MANUAL

Reduce the voltage to zero and turn off the power supply.

177

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Reverse Voltage (Rev E Boards ONLY)

Reverse the power supply connections on the LPA.

Watch the current meter on the power supply as you turn on the power supply.

Turn off the power supply if there is any current and troubleshoot the problem.

Increase the supply voltage to 40 V. Relay K14 should stay open all the time.

Reduce the voltage to zero and turn off the power supply.

23.2.5 Filter Bands Sweep

178

This test will check for the upper edge of the 6 low pass filters by sweeping them using the Tracking Generator and Spectrum Analyzer.

Compare the values displayed on the Analyzer to the values on the Filter Band

Table below. The values should be within -0 to +10%.

Procedure:

Install F3 and keep F1 and F2 removed.

Connect the LPA Test Box to LPA as follows;

C3 to IC3 socket

C4 to IC4 socket

C15 to J15

Set the switches in Receive position, Power off.

Connect Tracking Generator RF Out to J9 (RCVR) and set it to 0 dB RF Out.

Connect Spectrum Analyzer RF In to output dummy load antenna and set it to

5 MHz/division, 10 dB input attenuation.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Connect Power Supply (PS-35) 13.6V to J12 + and J14 -.

Turn Power Supply on, 13.6V indicator on Test Box should come on.

Turn Test Box Power switch on, 10V indicator should come on.

From Test Box Filter Band Select Knob (SW2), select each filter (A through F) by moving Knob from position 6 to 1.

The Spectrum Analyzer should display the bandpass of the corresponding filter. Compare the Analyzer value with the value of the corresponding filter in the Filter Band Table above. Results should be within ±10%.

Momentarily flip the LPA to transmit (SW1 flip to XMT) and observe the curve on the Analyzer. It should show an interrupted circuit.

Disconnect the Analyzer and Tracking Generator.

Turn Power Supply off

23.2.6 Transmit Alignment

Disconnect Spectrum Analyzer and Tracking Generator.

Connect LPA RF Out to a 250 W wattmeter and then to a 50 ? dummy load antenna (= 30 dB attenuator). The output of the attenuator goes to the scope.

Select any filter on the LPA from the Test Box.

Check that F2 and F3 are not installed. Turn power supply on and apply voltage to the LPA.

Switch to transmit and check the following voltages:

• collector of Q1 = 13.6 V (in transmit only)

• collector of Q2 and Q3 = 13.6 V (in transmit and receive)

• base of Q1 = 1.9 V, adjustable from R2

• emitter of Q1 = 1.2 V

• base of Q2 and Q3 = .70 VDC, adjustable from R32

• base of Q6, Q7, Q10 and Q11 = .67 VDC adjustable from R20 and R28

Turn power supply off and connect 20 A amp meters in the place of F1 and F2.

Select Filter A (6 on dial)

Connect RF Generator to RF In (J1) on LPA with 0 dB, 1.6 MHz RF Out.

Switch to transmit and watch for:

• current on Power Supply should never go higher than 32 A for 150 W RF

Out

• the twin current meters should not differ by more than 4 A. Use R20 and

R28 to bring them to = 2 A difference.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

179

SG-2000 MANUAL

Adjust the coils in the selected filter for lower current and higher RF Out, especially in the end of band frequencies.

If RF Out from LPA is less than 140 W, increase the RF Out from the Generator

(to no more than +3dB) until the power out is 140-160 W.

Note in the LPA Alignment form:

• RF In level from RF Generator (between -1 to +3 dBM)

• RF Out level from LPA (between 140-160 W)

• F1 and F2 current on corresponding amp meter

• Power Supply current

Repeat above for all frequencies listed in the Filter Band Table above, making sure the proper filter has been selected manually from the Test Box before each frequency is tested.

23.2.7 ALC Check

Automatic Level Control (ALC) consists of sensors T13, T14, amplifiers IC2 A,

C and D, buffer IC2 B on the LPA and IC208 on the Exciter.

Preset levels for Low and High power out are adjustable form R41 and R42 and control the amount of signal the IC8 attenuator on the Exciter lets reach the

LPA, therefore the amount of RF Out reaching the antenna.

On the Test Box, turn SW3 to RCV and turn power on (SW1).

Change modes of power from SW5, adjust R41 and R42 and check the voltage on TP1 on Test Box as follows:

Mode

(SW5)

R41 and R42

Fully Clockwise

High (L5=off) 0.08 ±0.02 VDC=V1

Low (L5=on) 4.8 ±0.2 VDC=V2

R41 and R42

Fully Counterclockwise

6.3 ± 0.2 VDC

6.3 ±0.2 VDC

Note: L5 on Test Box will indicate that Q14 on LPA is biased for not conducting, and corresponds to Low power mode.

Switch RF In to 8.0 MHz and select the appropriate filter on the LPA

Turn R41 and R42 fully clockwise.

Adjust RF In from RF Generator for 150 W RF Out from LPA, in transmit into

50 ? dummy load antenna.

With SW5 on High power, switch to transmit and note the voltage level at TP1 on Test Box. Write this value as V1 on the test form.

With SW5 on Low power, switch to transmit and note the voltage level at TP1 on Test Box. Write this value as V2 on the Test form.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

180

SG-2000 MANUAL

Verify that V2 - V1 = 4.5 VDC ± 0.5 VDC.

23.2.8 Temperature Sensor Check

The Temperature Sensor is built around IC1 on the LPA board and functions as follows:

At room temperature, the voltages on pins 1, 2 and 3 of IC1 are as follows:

IC1 pin 1 = 3.6 VDC

IC1 pin 2 = 0.05 VDC

IC1 pin 3 = 0.92 VDC

When the temperature of the heatsink reaches;

+55° C ±5° C

(the low temperature trigger) the voltage on pin 2 of IC1 is = the voltage on pin 3. This will cause the voltage on pin 1 of IC1 to drop to near 0, which will be sensed by the Main CPU board. Data will be sent 1) to the Head to flash the TEMP indicator, 2) to IC4 to pull pin 14 low (IC1 pin 2 will again go lower than pin 3 and pin 1 will go higher) and 3) to IC4 to pull pin 13 low to start the fan running.

+70° ±5° C

(high temperature trigger) 1) the fan will continue running, 2) IC4 pin 15 will go low which will switch the radio to Low Power transmit mode and 3) LO PWR will be displayed on the Head and the TEMP indicator keeps flashing.

On LPA Test Box, SW4 is a 3 position switch

Middle = L4 will stop lighting when temperature reaches low temp trigger point

Right = L4 will stop lighting when temperature reaches high temp trigger point.

Left = Simulation of low temp trigger point

In normal LPA testing on the bench, the temperature of the heatsink at thermister R75 is not allowed to reach trigger points. LPA Test Box simulates the increase of resistance with temperature and reaching the low temperature trigger points when SW4 is in the left position.

On LPA Test Box, turn SW3 to RCV position.

Flip SW4 through the 3 positions. If the temperature is less than 55° C ±5° C, L4 will stop lighting only in the Left position.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

181

Turn power supply off.

SG-2000 MANUAL

182

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

23.3 DISPLAY SECTION TESTING PROCEDURES

This section describes the testing procedures for the Display section of the SG-

2000 radio.

23.3.1 Required Testing Equipment

HP 331A Distortion Analyzer

HEATH KIT IG-5218 Audio Signal Generator or equivalent

PS-30 13.6V power supply

SGC Display RX Audio Test Fixture

Power Supply Capable of at least 2 Amps at 13.6 Volts for connecting the SG-

2000 to the PS-30 power supply

Connection Cables; CPU extension cable

Keyboard extension cable

DMM

SG-2000 Test Head

SG-2000 without head, RF Out adjusted to minimum, bypassed AM filter.

SG-2000 Test Head Microprocessor With Display Test Chip (IC16)

SG-2000 Test Head Microprocessor With Normal Chip (IC16)

SG-2000 Sample Display Boards ( 1 working and 1 bare PCB, latest rev)

Oscilloscope

Microphone PTT Toggle Switch

Microphones; 1 carbon, 1 dynamic

23.3.2 Circuit Description

The display board provides the keypad board interface, volume control, microphone amplifier, display interface, and back light control. The circuit can be seen on schematic J30100910. Information is received from the key board matrix on connector J3 and is passed to the head processor board on connector J2. The one exception to this is the on/off switch; it is passed from connector J3 to the exciter in connector J1.

The line receiver takes the balanced audio signal coming from the exciter and converts it into an unbalanced signal for the volume control. Volume control is provided by using a digital to analog (D to A) converter, IC16. In addition, the received audio signal is rectified by IC12B and fed to the analog to digital (A to

D) converter, IC14. IC14 also converts the photo cell voltage (on Rev E boards and earlier) and sends output to the head processor via pin 12 on J2. Jumper J6 is used to select either a dynamic (factory setting) or carbon microphone. The audio signal is converted from an unbalanced signal to a balanced signal by the line driver, IC11A and B. The balanced audio signal is sent to the exciter through

J1. When in CW mode, the CW signal is received from the exciter and treated as

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

183

SG-2000 MANUAL

if it were a receive signal. The speaker is enabled by holding SPE low in CW mode.

The receive audio signal is digitized for use by the squelch by over driving

IC12A. The output on pin 7 of IC12A is a clipped version of the receive audio signal. This is inverted by IC13A which is the TMR signal. The TMR signal has a pulse repetition rate equal to the receive audio frequency.

23.3.3. Test Setup

Visual inspection. Look for any quality defects.

Check all diodes and electrolytic capacitors for polarity.

Check for solder bridges and shorts. Compare to the sample display board.

Use the multimeter in the Ohms position. Check for short circuits on the VREF,

5VG, 5V, 8VG, 13.6VSW and OVEN lines.

Connect SG-2000 remote head cable from J503 on the SG-2000 to J1 on the display board under test.

Connect extender cable from J1 on the Test Head Microprocessor Board With

Display Test Chip to J2 on the display board under test.

Connect keyboard extender cable from J1 on the Test Head board to J3 on the display board under test. (At this stage there is no LCD installed on the PCB).

Connect the RF output of the SG-2000 to a power meter and then to a 50? dummy load.

LCD Installation

Turn on the power supply. After the standby LED comes on, apply power to the display by pressing the "POWER" button on the head.

Test for the following voltages.

5 VDC on each side of R13

5 Vpp clock of 65 Hz on each side of R12

Turn the power off.

Install new LCD, lamps and foam. See the working sample of Display PCB on the Display PCB under test.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

184

Voltage Check

Turn power on.

SG-2000 MANUAL

185

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

Using the multimeter, test each test point for the following voltages:

Cathode D1

Output IC1

SG-2000 MANUAL

13.6 VSW (same as power supply)

8 VG +/- 0.3 V

Output IC2 5 VG +/- 0.2 V

5 V +/- 0.2 V

V REF (4V +/- 0.3V)

Input

Ground

Output

Top View

IC1, IC2, IC3

Output IC3

Pin 1 IC12D

23.3.4 LCD Display Test

The Display Test Chip has a special program to exercise the LCD (liquid crystal display) by sequencing through all of the possible display outputs. The sequence is reset to 1 whenever the power is turned off. All keys on the head are disabled except for the following three:

The POWER key functions as normal.

The VOL. key starts the sequence or resumes the sequence if paused.

The six key pauses the sequence.

Press the VOL. key to start the sequence. Look for imperfect appearance of digits - digits continually on or off, not complete, etc.

Pause the sequence if any of the steps do not provide the expected output and troubleshoot the problem.

Turn off the radio and then the power supply.

23.3.5. Receive Audio Test

Setup - See Configuration schematic.

Remove the Test Head Microprocessor With Display Test Chip and replace with Test Head Microprocessor With Normal Chip.

Connect the Display RX Audio Test Fixture as follows (see setup schematic):

One banana plug to the audio signal generator sine wave out.

One banana plug to the input of the distortion analyzer.

SPKR connector to B.U.T. J5.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

186

SG-2000 MANUAL

FONE connector to B.U.T. J4.

Audio connector replaces wires 9 and 10 of J1 remote cable.

Turn on the power supply and then the radio. Set the radio to the base station frequency in A3J mode.

Set the Oscilloscope:

Vertical = 1 volt/div.

Horizontal = 0.2 msec/div.

Set the Distortion Analyzer:

Function = Voltmeter

Meter Range = 1.0 VRMS

Set Audio Generator:

Load = External

Frequency = 1 KHz

Amplitude = 0 VRMS

23.3.6 S Meter Test

Adjust the amplitude of the audio signal generator for a full scale reading on the S meter. Full scale should correspond with a 10 dB increase from a 0 (no segments) indication of signal strength. Record the VRMS amplitude and dB level on the Distortion analyzer.

Amplitude dB

Full display

.3 to .4 VRMS

-4 dB zero display

.03 to .05 VRMS

-15 dB

Reduce the amplitude of the audio signal until there are zero bars on the S meter.

Record the dB difference on the Distortion analyzer. This should be:

? dB = 10dB ?2 dB -4 dB - (-15 dB) = 11 dB

If test fails, check IC14 pin 2. For .5 VRMS Audio Input from generator, it should read 2.7 VDC and for .05 VRMS it should read .2 VDC.

187

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.3.7

SG-2000 MANUAL

Speaker Level Check

Change the distortion analyzer to 0.3 VRMS range.

Adjust the audio generator for 100 mVRMS reading on the distortion analyzer.

Increase the audio volume to the maximum level.

Measure and record the voltage across the SPKR resistor with the oscilloscope.

Ensure the speaker is enabled, signal should be a clean sine wave:

SPKR = 8 Vpp to 10Vpp

If test failed, check for the following levels:

IC11 Pin 9 .05

IC11 Pin 10 .05

IC11 Pin 8 540

IC16 Pin 8 540

IC16 Pin 11 60

IC20 Pin 2 5

IC20 Pin 1 .5

IC18 Pin 1 .3

IC18 Pin 4 8-10

Vpp

Vpp mVpp mVpp mVpp mVpp

Vpp mVpp

Vpp

23.3.8 Phone Level Check

Turn speaker off by pressing SPKR 4 key, increase volume to the maximum level then measure and record the voltage across the FONE resistor with the same 100 mV audio signal.

FONE = .6 to .8 Vpp

If test fails, check for the following levels:

IC19 Pin 9 .5 Vpp

R81 & C44 60

IC17 Pin 3 40 mVpp mVpp

Output .6 to .8 Vpp

188

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.3.9

SG-2000 MANUAL

Squelch Test

The squelch (SQL) function will keep the receiving path into the speaker open as long as the received shgnal is of broadcasting structure and its strength meets the SQL's minimum level, preset by the user.

The SQL level can be set from the keyboard from a range of 0-9 as follows:

Press Effect.

SHIFT Gain access to the secondary level of keyboard functions.

SQL LEVEL The currently set squelch level is displayed on the bar graph and is able to be modified.

Up or Down Arrows or 0-9 Selects a new squelch level which will take effect if no other button is pushed for 6 seconds.

Audible beep after

6 seconds squelch setting.

Confirmation that the last displayed number is the new

SQL Toggles the squelch on or off.

Test Procedure:

Program the SG-2000 to a local AM broadcasting station.

Turn volume to medium level.

Set SQL level to 1.

Enable SQL function: the audio will be cut off.

Switch the SG-2000 antenna from the dummy load to the aerial antenna (SW2).

The broadcasting signal should break in and should be heard on the SKK.

Switch the SG-2000 antenna back to the dummy load. Without the broadcasting signal, the SQL will cut off the audio.

Troubleshooting

If the test fails, switch SW1 to the audio generator input and inject 100 mVRMS,

1 KHz. You should read a 4 to 5 Vpp square wave on IC13A pin 12 and 5V level data on IC13A pin 11.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

189

SG-2000 MANUAL

Speaker Clipping Level Check 23.3.10

Connect the scope probe to the SPKR resistor and change to 2 volts/div.

With volume set at maximum, increase the audio generator output level until clipping is visible on the scope. Record the results.

Audio in = 0.12 VRMS to 0.19 VRMS

SPKR = 10 Vpp to 12.0 Vpp

Verify that no spikes are generated on the scope while adjusting the volume up and down.

Turn off the radio and power supply. Disconnect the Display RX Audio Test

Fixture.

Transmit Tests

Enabling Test

23.3.11 Microphone

Connect the microphone and speaker cables from the test head to J4 and J5 respectively.

Turn on the power supply and then the radio. Set the radio to the base station frequency in A3J mode.

Connect the Microphone PTT Toggle Switch to the microphone input on the test head. Ensure the switch is off. Connect the audio generator to the

Microphone PTT Toggle Switch.

Set Audio Generator for.

Load = External

Frequency = 1 KHz

Amplitude = 30 mVRMS (measure with voltmeter)

With J6 in the DYN configuration, adjust the volume to the maximum. Listen for the 1 KHz tone from the generator on the speaker. If any tone can be heard, check Q3; it could be defective.

190

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

©1995, SGC, Inc.

23.3.12

SG-2000 MANUAL

Dynamic Microphone Level Check

Select DYN on J6 for dynamic microphone.

For level check without a voice compressor, set jumpers P7 and P8 in Bypass position.

For 30 mVRMS, 1 KHz sinusoidal on microphone input j4, adjust R66 for 1.5

Vpp to GND on pins 9 and 10 of J1.

For level check with a voice compressor, to achieve 5 mVRMS to VRMS variaton of 1 KHz sinusoidal on microphone input J4, adjust R66 and R1 on voice compressor for constant 1.5 Vpp to GND on pins 9 and 10 of J1.

23.3.13 Carbon Microphone Level Check

Do not readjust R66 or R1 as in Dynamic Mic Level Check. They remain set as shipped from factory.

For ---VRMS, 1 KHz sinusoidal, without voice compressor, on microphone input J4, the reading on pins 9 and 10 of J1 should be 1.5 VRMS.

For ---VRMS, 1 KHz sinusoidal, with voice compressor, on microphone input

J4, the reading on pins 9 and 10 of J1 should be 1.5 VRMS.

23.3.14 Microphone Voice Check

With J6 in CARB configuration, plug in an SGC carbon microphone and check with the base station for quality of transmission.

With J6 in DYN configuration, plug in an SGC dynamic microphone and check with the base station for quality of transmission.

Beep Volume Adjustment

Set resistor R87 to 1 o'clock.

Enable the beep by pressing “SHIFT FUNC” and then “5”.

Adjust R87 for a comfortable audio level while pressing buttons.

23.3.15 Button Functions

Check that all of the button functions react properly (see manual for details) and that they have the correct readout on the display.

191

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

23.4 HEAD CPU and MAIN CPU TESTING PROCEDURES

This section describes the test procedures for the SG-2000's Main CPU and Head CPU subassemblies.

23.4.1 Required Testing Equipment

HEATH KIT IG-5218 Audio Signal Generator or equivalent

Power Supply Capable of at least 2 Amps at 13.6 Volts between the SG-2000 and the PS-30

Connection Cables; CPU extension cable

Remote Head Cable

DMM

SG-2000 Head

SG-2000 Chassis

Oscilloscope

Microphone PTT Toggle Switch

Digital Logic Probe

PS-30

SGC 6805 ports test board, with software

Head CPU bare board sample

Head CPU functional sample

Known good set of socketed ICs

23.4.2 Circuit Description

The Head Processor CPU is a one page schematic, J30100935.

The Head Processor board uses the same Printed Circuit Board (PCB) as the

Main Processor board. The two processors communicate with each other over the SIN and SOUT lines. The main functions of the head processor are to control the display, keyboard and audio levels. This is all done in software on the MC146805E2 microcomputer. The software resides in EPROM on IC16.

The Main Processor is a two page schematic, J30100930.

The Main Processor board uses the same PCB as the Head Processor board.

The two processors communicate with each other over the SIN and SOUT lines.

The main functions of the Main Processor are to select the proper frequency and to control the various modes of the SG-2000.

192

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.4.3

SG-2000 MANUAL

Pretest

Visual inspection. Look for any mechanical defects.

Check for solder bridges, wrong parts installed, and shorts by comparing to the sample head processor board. Check all five jumpers.

Use the multimeter in the Ohms position. Check for short circuits on the 5VG,

5VSW and 13.6VSW lines. Note: the 5VG and 5VSW lines are connected together by jumper JMP5.

23.4.4 MicroProcessor Ports Test

Connect SGC Processor Ports Test Board to 13.6 V power supply.

Connect the ribbon connector on board test board to J1 on the head processor board under test.

Install the SGC 6805 Processor Ports Test Chip in the IC16 socket on the CPU.

Install the MicroProcessor chip in IC9 and all other socketed ICs.

Turn on Ports Test power switch. The following should be checked.

The Port A LEDs should strobe from A0, A1, …, to A6 then A7.

The Port B LEDs should strobe from B7, B6, …, to B3 then B2. Note: LEDs

B0 and B1 should not light up.

The TPR LED should also be on.

Press the TPR button. The TPR LED should go out while the button is pushed and turn back on when released.

The Data LED should be lit.

If the board fails one of these checks, turn off the Ports Test Board. Uninstall the socketed ICs one by one in this order: IC19, IC18, IC7, IC11, and IC8 to find the problem area. Use the digital logic probe in the TTL position to trouble shoot the board.

Repeat MicroProcessor Ports Test after every IC removal.

193

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

23.4.5

SG-2000 MANUAL

Clock Test

Measure and record the frequency at IC10.

Pin

5

Frequency

153.6 KHz +/- 63 Hz

9 4,915.2 KHz +/- 2 KHz

Measure the frequency on IC7 pin 3 and adjust C14 so that a reading of 32,768

Hz is obtained.

23.4.6 Data In/Out Check

This procedure tests if data signals are reaching TXD and RXD on UART (IC8).

Data Out Check

Press SW5 (RS-232 out). DS3 (SG-2000 out) should turn off and DS4 (RS-232 out) should turn on. Releasing SW5 will return to original stage.

RS-232 Data In Check (Main CPU only): Press SW3 (RS-232 Sin). IC8 pin 2 should go to 0 VDC from pulsing.

SG-2000 Data In check: Press SW4 (SG-2000 Sin). IC8 pin 2 should go to 0 VDC from pulsing.

23.4.6 Battery Installation (Main CPU only)

(Note: The presence or absence of the battery will not affect the tests described so far.)

Remove +.

Check the place where the battery will be installed with a DMM in the ohms position, it should read not less than 3 M? .

The battery should read not less than 2.8 VDC before being soldered onto the

CPU.

Secure the battery with foam before soldering it on top of IC14 and IC 12.

While the CPU is removed from the radio, check that pin 2 of IC7 reads 2.8

VDC.

194

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

The Main Processor uses a “real time clock,” IC7, to keep time and store important data while there is no power to the SG-2000. While power is applied to the SG-2000, capacitor C31 charges to 5.5 volts. When power is removed, capacitor C-31 will discharge through Q2. This keeps the battery power turned on. After two weeks, the charge in C31 is reduced to the point that Q2 turns off. This prevents the battery from fully discharging. This method of using a battery and capacitor provides a much longer life span than a NiCad battery and gives the same performance.

23.4.7 Operational Test

Remove the CPU from the Ports Test Board and replace IC16 with normal software.

Connect the CPU through an extension cable to the SG-2000's head (for Head

CPU) or SG-2000's Exciter (for Main CPU).

Turn on the power at the head.

Verify that all keys operate and perform proper functions (consult other sections of this manual for complete descriptions of proper functions.

Functions that should be checked:

Keeping a programmed time, date, channel and frequency on display for

30 seconds after the PS-30 has been turned off.

Alarm Generator

ON/OFF function from head

Program then erase a channel

C31 charging check (Main CPU only).

Place the Main CPU tested on the CPU charger for not less than 15 minutes.

Ten minutes after the Main CPU is removed from the charger, check that the voltage across C31 is still no less than 5VDC.

195

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

©1995, SGC, Inc.

23.4.8

SG-2000 MANUAL

Reference Logic

IC2 is a 5 volt regulator, 78L05.

IC3 is a Dual 2-to-4 Line Decoder, 74HC139.

Inputs

Truth Table

IC3A

Outputs

L

L

L

G

P1

H

L

H

L

H

A4

P2

X

L

L

H

H

A5

P3

X

L

H

H

L

Y3

P7

H

H

IC4 is a Quad 2-Input NAND Gate, 74HC00.

L

L

L

G

P15

H

L

Inputs

Truth Table

IC3B

Outputs

H

L

H

A6

P14

X

L

L

H

H

A7

P13

X

L

H

L

H

Y2

P10

H

H

H

H

L

Y3

P9

H

H

A2

P10

L

L

H

H

Inputs

Truth Table

IC4C

Outputs

A3

P9

L

H

L

H

P8

H

H

H

L

H = high

L = low

IC5 is a Triple 3-Input NOR Gate, 74HC27.

X

H

A2

P3

L

X

Inputs

Truth Table

IC5B

Outputs

A3

P4

L

X

H

X

Y3

P5

L

H

X

X

UCE

P6

H

L

L

L

H = high

L = low

X = don't care

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

196

SG-2000 MANUAL

IC6 is a Quad 2-Input NOR Gate, 74HC02.

Truth Table

IC6A

H

H

A8

P3

L

L

Inputs

A9

P2

L

H

L

H

Outputs

P1

H

L

L

L

H = high

L = low

IC8 is an Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter (ACIA), HD63B50.

The data rate = RxC or TxC / 16. Normally this is set to 9600. The parallel input/output lines are B0 through B7.

The Transmit Data (TxD pin 6) is the serial output line. It is normally “high” when not in use.

The Receive Data (RxD pin 2) is the serial input line. It floats at about 2.5 volts when not in use.

Enable (E pin 14) enables the bus input/output data buffers and clocks data to and from the ACIA.

Chip Selects (CS0, pin 8, CS1, pin 10, and CS2 bar, pin 9) are high impedance

TTL compatible input lines used to address the ACIA. The ACIA is selected when CS0 and CS1 are "high" and CS2 bar is "low". Transfers to and from the

ACIA are then performed under the control of the Enable (E) signal,

Read/Write, and Register Select.

Register Select (RS, pin 11). A "high" level is used to select the

Transmit/Receive Data Registers and a "low" level the Control/Status

Registers. The R/W line is used in conjunction with Register Select to select the read-only or write-only register in each register pair.

Read/Write (R/W pin 13) is used to control the direction of data. A "high" on the Read/Write enables the read-only register and a "low" enable the writeonly registers.

Interrupt Request (IRQ bar) is an open drain (no internal pull-up) active "low" output interrupt that is set internally to the chip. The IRQ bar stays low as long as the cause of the interrupt is present within the ACIA.

The Clear-to-Send (CTS bar, pin 24) should be connected to ground.

197

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Data Carrier Detect (DCD bar, pin 23) is the input signal corresponding to the

"carrier detect" signal which shows carrier detect from a modem. When the

DCD bar goes “high,” the ACIA stops all the receiving operation and sets the receiving part in reset status. The IRQ bar goes “low” if interrupt enable is set, while DCD bar is “high.” When the DCD bar goes “low,” the receiving part is allowed to receive data. The DCD bar should be connected to ground.

IC10 is a Asynchronous 14-Stage Binary Counter and Oscillator, SN74HC4060.

A crystal oscillator is connected between pins 10 and 11. The clock frequency can be measured at pin 9. The frequency at pin 5 = frequency pin 9 / 32. The frequency at pin 7 = frequency pin 9 / 16.

IC15 is a Tri-State Octal D-Type Latch, 74HC373. Data is received on pins 7, 14,

8, 13, 4, 17, 3, and 18, which correspond to data lines B0 through B7 respectively. Data is output on pins 6, 15, 9, 12, 5, 16, 2, and 19 which correspond to data lines A0 through A7 respectively.

198

Inputs

Truth Table

IC15

Outputs

L

H

AS

P11

L

L

X

B0-B7

H

A0 - A7

H

L

Qo

H = high

L = low

Qo = level of output before steady-state input

conditions were established.

IC16 is a 65,536-Bit Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory, 27C64-20.

Lines A0-A7 are the address and B0-B7 are the data output lines. Data is output when CE bar, pin 20, and OE bar, pin 22, are low. Otherwise, the output is in a high impedance state.

IC7 is a Real-Time Clock Plus Ram (RTC), MC146818.

Pin 3 ~ 4.5 Vpp @ 32.768 KHz

Chip Enable (CE bar pin 13) must be "low" for a bus cycle in which the

MC146818 is to be accessed. CE bar is not latched and must remain stable during the cycle.

Read/Write (R/W pin 15) is used to control the direction of data. A "high" on the Read/Write enables a read cycle and a "low" a write cycle.

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

23.5 FINAL ASSEMBLY TESTING PROCEDURES

In addition to the checks, tests, adjustments, measurements and calibrations the individual PCBs go through, each fully assembled radio is also thoroughly tested before being sent out to the customer. Though the actual tests are long and detailed, a listing of the tests performed before any SG-2000 is shipped to a customer will indicate our commitment to providing the best radio possible.

23.5.1 Pre Rack #1 Tests

The following are the tests performed on each SG-2000 before going on Rack #1 for 12 hours of continuous 100 W CW transmitting on 1.9 MHz into our light bulb antenna load:

Serial number assignment

Bench inspection (visual, ohms, volts, etc.)

PLLs voltage check and adjustment

Receive SSB sensitivity check

Receive AM sensitivity check

AGC check

ALC 150/50 W transmit adjustment

Carrier insertion check and adjustment

150/50 W power check for for 1.6 to 30 MHz

Head functions check

Communication with SGC Base Station

Antenna mismatch protection in transmit

Recovery at power supply failure

135 W RF Out spectrum quality adjustment

RS-232 port check

11.94 oscillator check

Installation on Rack #1 for 12 hour transmit test and Test Log entry

199

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

Pre Rack #2 Tests 23.5.2

The following tests are done to the SG-2000 after 12 hours on Rack #1 and before 12 hours continuous cycling 150 W CW transmitting on 4.5 MHz into the light bulb antenna load on Rack #2:

Inspection before removal from Rack #1

Bench inspection (visual, ohms, serial, etc.)

PLLs voltages check and adjustment

Receive SSB sensitivity check

Receive AM sensitivity check

ALC 150/50 W transmit adjustment

Carrier insertion check and adjustment

150/50 W transmit adjustment

Head functions check

Communication with SGC Base Station

11.94 oscillator check and adjustment

Installation on Rack #2 and Test Log entry

23.5.3 Pre Exit Tests

After 24 hours on the testing racks and before any unit goes out the door, it receives these final inspections:

Inspection before removal from Rack #2

Bench inspection (visual, ohms, serial, etc.)

Receive SSB sensitivity check

Carrier insertion check and adjustment

150/50 W power check for 1.6-30 MHz

SGC Smartuner™ check

Head functions check

Communication with SGC Base Station

11.94 oscillator check and adjustment

200

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

24.0 Schematic Reference Section

INCLUDING PART LOCATION DIAGRAMS

Page 197

Page 198

Page 199

Page 200

Page 201

Page 202

Page 203

Page 204

Page 205

Page 206

Page 207

Page 208

Page 209

Page 181

Page 182

Page 183

Page 184

Page 185

Page 186

Page 187

Page 188

Page 189

Page 190

Page 191

Page 192

Page 193

Page 194

Page 195

Page 196

©1995, SGC, Inc.

Exciter Schematic

Exciter Schematic

Exciter Schematic

Exciter Schematic

Exciter Schematic

Exciter Schematic

LPA Schematic

J30100920 sh 1 of 6

J30100920 sh 2 of 6

J30100920 sh 3 of 6

J30100920 sh 4 of 6

J30100920 sh 5 of 6

J30100920 sh 6 of 6

J30100500 sh 1 of 2

LPA Schematic

Display Schematic

Display Schematic

Microprocessor Schematic

Microprocessor Schematic

J30100500 sh 2 of 2

J30100910 sh 1 of 2

J30100910 sh 2 of 2

J30100930 sh 1 of 2

J30100930 sh 2 of 2

Microprocessor Head Schematic

Mic In Schematic

J30100935 sh 1 of 1

J30100913 sh 1 of 1

AM Rejection Filter Schematic

Exciter PCB Layout ,

J30100921 sh 1 of 1

MicroProcessor/Exciter Interface Section J40100920-1

Exciter PCB Layout,

VCO and Time Base Section

Exciter PCB Layout,

Attn/RF Amp/Power Supply Section

Exciter PCB Layout,

SSB Filter/IF Amp/AM Det Section

LPA, PCB Layout

Display Head, PCB Layout

MicroProcessor/Head, PCB Layout

MicroProcessor/Ecxiter, PCB Layout

J40100920-2

J40100920-3

J40100920-4

J40100500

J40100910

J40100935

J40100930

Key Pad Matrix J20100200

Rear Panel Parts Layout and Interconnections J40100300

Block Diagram, Head

Block Diagram, Exciter

Block Diagram, LPA

J40100550

J40100920

J40100500

Block Diagram, MicroProcessor J40100930,35

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

201

J30100920 sh 1 of 6

SG-2000 MANUAL

202

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 2 of 6

SG-2000 MANUAL

203

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 3 of 6

SG-2000 MANUAL

204

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 4 of 6

SG-2000 MANUAL

205

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 5 of 6

SG-2000 MANUAL

206

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100920 sh 6 of 6

SG-2000 MANUAL

207

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100500 sh 1 of 2

SG-2000 MANUAL

208

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100500 sh 2 of 2

SG-2000 MANUAL

209

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100910 sh 1 of 2

SG-2000 MANUAL

210

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100910 sh 2 of 2

SG-2000 MANUAL

211

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100930 sh 1 of 2

SG-2000 MANUAL

212

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100930 sh 2 of 2

SG-2000 MANUAL

213

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100935 sh 1 of 1

SG-2000 MANUAL

214

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100913 sh 1 of 1

SG-2000 MANUAL

215

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J30100921 sh 1 of 1

SG-2000 MANUAL

216

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100920-1

SG-2000 MANUAL

217

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100920-2

SG-2000 MANUAL

218

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100920-3

SG-2000 MANUAL

219

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100920-4

SG-2000 MANUAL

220

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100500

SG-2000 MANUAL

221

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100910

SG-2000 MANUAL

222

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100935

SG-2000 MANUAL

223

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100930

SG-2000 MANUAL

224

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J20100200

SG-2000 MANUAL

225

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100300

SG-2000 MANUAL

226

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100550

SG-2000 MANUAL

227

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100920

SG-2000 MANUAL

228

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100500 Block Diagram

SG-2000 MANUAL

229

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

J40100930, 935

SG-2000 MANUAL

230

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

231

Index

11.94 MHz Reference Oscillator Test 132

20 dB Attenuator Check 138

20 dB Attn 54

30 MHz Low-Pass Filter Adjustment 142

600 ? Port/Audio Out Check

600? Port Check

139

141

About the SG-2000

AC Power Supplies

Additional Control Heads

AGC Adjustment

Alarm Generator

Alarm Generator Check

Alarm Start

ALC Check

10

31

28

138

116

143

111

142, 161

ALE and Adaptive Controllers 100

ALE Controller - Command Examples 103

AM Filter Bypass

AM Mode Alignment

113

137

Antenna Couplers

Antenna Feed Lines

Antenna Systems

37

37

34

Antenna Wire Size

Attenuator

Auto-Answer Devices

Automatic Level Control

35

71

87

118

AUTOMATIC LINK ESTABLISHMENT -

ALE 100

Back Light

Band Scan

Bar Graph

Base Station and Fixed Antennas

BASIC FUNCTIONS

57, 72

42

51

36

44

Basic Tune-up Procedure (Alignment) 112

Battery Installation (Main CPU only) 173

Beep 58, 72

Begin Scanning

Broadcast Band Filter

Button Functions

Cabling

Carbon Microphone Level Check

Carrier Insertion Adjustment

CHAN

Change Channel - Telex Mode

Change Channel - Voice Mode

Change Channel Scan Rate

(In Channel Scan Mode)

Change Frequency Scan Rate

(In Frequency Scan Mode)

Change Frequency Scan Step

69

68

69

Changing Frequency or Channel

Scan Rates

Channel

68

42, 59, 60

66

108

170

30

170

142

49, 52

61

60

CHANNEL FUNCTIONS

Channel Scan

Clarifier Use

Clock / Date

Clock Test

45

42, 47

62

55, 59, 70

173

Computer Control of SG-2000 3

Computer Networks - Serial Control 87

Continuous Duty Ratings

Control Circuits

23

12

Control Head Installations

Control Head Number Display

Control Head Placement

Control Head Wiring

Control Heads

Coupler Port Check

Crystal Oven

27

72

16

17

13

143

117

CW key

CW Level Adjustment

Data Communications

Data In/Out Check

DEFINE MEMORY

Delete

Delete a Channel from Memory

108

140

3

173

47

58, 72

64

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

232

Deleting Errors in Entry

Dimensions and Weight

Display

Display (Date / Time)

Display Alarm Time OFF

64

4

58

72

70

Display Alarm Time ON and Frequency 69

DISPLAY TESTING PROCEDURES 163

Dynamic Microphone Level Check 170

Emergency Calling 111

Enter a Duplex Channel into Memory 64

Enter a Simplex Channel into Memory 63

Exciter Testing Procedures 129

Exsel-100 Selective Calling System 106

Extension of Control Head Wiring 85

External Accessories

External Coupler Installation

5, 18

22

External Modem, Weatherfax and High

Seas Direct™ 23

External Software

External Speakers

Filter Bands Sweep

Fine Tuning - CW Operation

FREQ

Frequency

FREQUENCY FUNCTIONS

Frequency Change - Direct Entry

Frequency Change - General

Frequency Change - Incremental

Frequency Scan

Front Panel

Front Panel Controls

Front Panel Display

FWD

FWD - SWR

General Description of SG-2000

GPS Software

Ham Radio Use

15

48

Hard Disk Installation 90

HEAD CPU and MAIN CPU TESTING

PROCEDURES 171

88

17

159

63

49, 56

59, 61

44

61

61

62

42

43

52

49

50

58, 73

1

Head Port Audio Out

HI LO

High Seas Direct™ Connections

History of the SG-2000

Installation

Intcm

Intcm / Xcv

Intercom

Internal Accessories

Key Functions

LCD Display Test

LCD Installation

LCD Numerals

Line of Demarcation

Load Frequency Limits

Location of Power Supplies

Lock Feature

Lock for Channelized Operation Only 73

Lockout 58, 73

LPA

LPA Testing Procedures

LSB - USB

127

156

53

Marine Radio Mounting

Marine Antennas

Marine Ground Systems

Marine Installation

80

82

80

80

Marine Use 48

Master oscillator with Oven 114, 117

Memory 42

Microphone Enabling Test

Microphone Level Adjustment

Microphone Voice Check

Microprocessor Assembly

169

140

170

114

MicroProcessor Assembly

MicroProcessor Ports Test

Mobile Antennas

Mobile Grounds

Mobile Installation

Mobile Power Supplies

Mode

115

172

38

76

75

32

53

165

164

50

86

66

16

59

51

55

71

5

44

139

51

82

8

21

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

233

MODE FUNCTIONS

Modulation Characteristics, Audio

Frequency Response

45

118

Modulation Characteristics, Peak

Envelope Power Limiting 119

Multiple Control Head Specifications 4

Near Vertical Incidence Skywave 36

Noise Blanker 58, 72

Oil Platform Software

Operating Session

Operating the SG-2000

Operational Test

Operator Licenses

Oscillator and Filter Operation

Output Low Pass Filters

15

59

41

174

20

113

118 oven Switch

PC Cable Assembly

Phone Level Check

PLLs

116

98

167

114, 115, 129

Power

Power Failure Recovery Check

Power HI-LO

59

143

71

Power Requirements

Power Supplies

PowerTalk™

PowerTalk™ SA

Precautions

Prgm

Primary Keyboard Functions

Program a Channel Bank

Program Functions

2

30

9, 14

14

6

49, 52

52

65

59

Program Time ON Frequency

Program Time ON-OFF

Program Timer on Channel

70

70

70

Program User Channel into Memory 63

Programmed Scan 42

Programming

PWR Hi / Lo

63

55

QMS Recommended for Mobile Use 39

Rack Mount Kit Installation 24

Radio Licenses

Rate

19

58

RCV

Recall a Selected SG-2000 Memory into

Active Use

Receive Audio Test

49

103

165

Receive Sensitivity Check

Receive Troubleshooting

Receiver Signal Path

RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS

Red LEDs

Remote Control

Remote Head Cable Extension

134

143

10

2

51

85

29

Remote Head Kit Installation

Remote Mobile Heads

RS-232 Serial Control Software

27

14

88

RS-232 Software Installation 89

RS-232 Software Main Menu Display 92

RS-232 Software Main Menu

Operations 93

RS-232 Software Menu 2 Operations 95

RS-232 Software Programming

Functions 96

RS-232 Software Technical Support 91

RS-232 Software Troubleshooting 91

Running Software from Floppy Drives 90

S Meter Test 166

S or SWR 50

Sample Entries

Scan

Scan Bank

Scan by Channel Banks

48

49, 56, 59

42

68

Scan by Channels

Scan by Frequency - General

67

65

Scan by Frequency - Specific Range 66

SCAN FUNCTIONS

Scanning Functions

46

64

Scanning in One Direction Only 128

SCHEMATIC REFERENCE

SECTION 180

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

234

Serial Communication Protocol

Serial Logic Switches

Serial Logic Switches

Set Clock

Set Date

SG-2000 Connections to

ALE Controller

SG-2000 Front Panel

SG-2000 MicroProcessor Reset

Procedure

104

13

110

SG-2000 Performance

Measurements 121

SG-2000 Performance Specifications 2

SG-2000 Rear Panel 13

102

114

116

71

71

SG-2000 Rear Panel Connections

SG-2000 Serial Port Operation

SG-2000 Software and Accessories

SG-2000 Test Procedures

SHIFT FUNCTIONS

Shift Functions

Shift/ Func

Shock and Vibration Mounting

21

101

15

129

46

57

52

75

Short Haul Modems/Auto-Answer

Devices

SITOR

SlimPak

86

13, 15, 18, 53, 54, 57, 61, 67

9

Small Numerals

Solar Powered Chargers

Speaker Clipping Level Check

50

33

169

Speaker Level Check

Spk

SQL

SQL Level

Squelch Scale Recalibration

Squelch Test

SSB Alignment

SSB Transmit Alignment

Standard Features

Station Licenses

Step

167

54, 127

54, 127

57

110

168

136

141

4

19

58

TELEREX™

TELEREX™ ARQ/FEC/SELFEC

System

Temp

Temperature Sensor Check

Temporary Settings

TEST EQUIPMENT SET-UP

FOR SG-2000

Timer

TIMER FUNCTIONS

18

107

51, 127

162

74

122

50, 56, 59, 69

47

Tone Generator

Tone Generator

Transformer-Rectifier Supplies

Transmit Alignment

Transmit Calibration

Transmit Channel Locking

Transmit Frequency Monitor

114

116

31

160

140

73

74

Transmitter Signal Path 11

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS 3

Trouble Shooting 127

Unconventional Mobile Antennas 40

Unload Frequency Limits 67

Unlock Channelized Only Operation 73

Unpacking 7

User Memory

VCO

42

114, 115, 129

VCO Check

VCO Troubleshooting

Vehicular Noise Sources

132, 133

144

78

View Timer

Voc - Tlx

57

54

Voice/Telex Filters Check 139

Voltage Values for the Exciter PCB 145

Volume

XMT

71

49

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

SG-2000 MANUAL

235

©1995, SGC, Inc.

The SGC Building, 13737 S.E. 26th St. Bellevue, WA. 98005 USA

TEL: (206) 746-6310 FAX: (206) 746-6384

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Key Features

  • 150 Watt Output
  • Multi-Mission
  • HF SSB
  • 1.6-30 MHz
  • Computer Control
  • Multiple Control Head Support
  • Data Communications
  • GPS Software Support
  • Oil Platform Software Support

Related manuals

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the power requirement of the device?
The device requires 13.8 VDC at 22 Amps.
What is the size of the device?
The device is 8" W x 10" H x 14" D (203 x 254 x 356 mm).
What is the weight of the device?
The device weighs 26 lbs (11.8 kg).
What is the frequency range of the device?
The device's frequency range is 1.6-30 MHz.
What is the output power of the device?
The device's output power is 150 Watts.

advertisement